- Manuals
- Brands
- Seat
- Car
- Altea Freetrack
- Owner's Manual
Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual PDF
A LT
EA F
R EE
TR AC
K O
W N
ER S
M A
N U
A L
In gl
s 5
P8 01
20 03
EC (0
7. 10
) (
G T9
)
A LT
EA F
R EE
TR AC
K In
gl s
( 07
.1 0)
5P 80
12 00
3E C
Portada Freetrack.qxd:Maquetacin 1 23/7/10 08:30 Pgina 3
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Portada Freetrack_interior.qxd:maquetacin 23/7/10 08:32 Pgina 3
efully to familiarise yourself with
ill help preserve its value.
s and part replacements.
, as it should be kept with the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Foreword This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling w
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner
vehicle.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Contents 3
shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
onditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
teering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
arking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ctical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
BS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lectronic Stability Programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
conomical and environmentally friendly driving
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
152
153
156
156
158
162
166
168
168
169
170
171
174
175
180
182
183
187
187
187
188
189
195
195
196
197
200
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and storage compartments . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
s
F
L
Air c
H
C
2
G
Driv
S
S
Ig
S
M
A
H
P
C
Pra
Inte
B
A
(A
E
Driv
R
E
E
D
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
17
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
51
55
55
55
57
60
67
76
88
88
89
93
96
96
102
104
106
108
110
112
115
115
123
125
126
130
133
133
134
136
138
140
Contents4
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) without
Start&Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) Front-wheel
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) All-wheel
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF
with/without Start&Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF All-
wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF All-
wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
201
202
202
203
205
205
206
212
214
214
214
215
215
216
216
217
218
219
222
226
228
232
233
236
236
244
244
246
253
255
259
268
271
275
275
275
277
277
279
279
280
281
282
283
285
286
288
289
Manual structure 5
Manual structure What you should know before reading this manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA FREETRACK, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modi- fied depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in certain
versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are
only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information on the protec-
tion of the environment.
Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Content6
Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical Tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Specifications Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s a part of the occupant protection
the risk of injury in the event of acci-
afety of your passengers in danger. In the event
ipment may reduce the risk of injury. The
f the safety equipment in your SEAT:
e front and rear side seats,
nt seats,
r the front seats,
eat backrests.
ts*,
s for child seats in the rear side seats with the
straints,
e position and non-use position
n.
ned above works together to provide you and
t possible protection in the event of an accident.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers safety.
WARNING
This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the owners manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment i
system and can reduce
dent.
Never put your safety or the s
of an accident, the safety equ
following list includes most o
three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiters for th
belt tensioners for the fro
belt height adjustment fo
front airbags,
side airbags in the front s
curtain airbags,
active front head restrain
ISOFIX anchorage point
ISOFIX system,
height-adjustable head re
head restraints with in-us
adjustable steering colum
The safety equipment mentio
your passengers with the bes
Safe driving8
gers in the rear seats always have the
-use position page 14
adjust the head restraints according to
propriate child seats and properly
age 46.
ing position. Instruct your passengers
r sitting position. page 10.
curely. Instruct your passengers also to
roperly. page 19.
ety?
determined by your driving style and
of all occupants.
sible for yourself and your passengers.
r driving safety is affected by any circum-
self as well as others on the road ,
traffic and do not get distracted by
e calls.
riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
d speed limits.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passen-
gers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyones business!
Before setting off
The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and
the safe operation of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Make sure that the vehicles lights and turn signals are working
properly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Make sure all luggage is secured page 17.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according
to your size.
Ensure that the passen
head restraints in the in
Instruct passengers to
their height.
Protect children with ap
applied seat belts p
Assume the correct sitt
also to assume a prope
Fasten your seat belt se
fasten their seat belts p
What affects driving saf
Driving safety is largely
the personal behaviour
As a driver, you are respon
When your concentration o
stance, you endanger your
for this reason:
Always pay attention to
passengers or telephon
Never drive when your d
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws an
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Safe driving10
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the driver:
el so that there is a distance of at least 25
g wheel and the centre of your chest
rwards or backwards so that you are able
, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
angled .
ch the highest point of the steering
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head fig. 2.
upright position so that your backrests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
Adjust the steering whe
cm between the steerin
fig. 1.
Move the driver seat fo
to press the accelerator
your knees still slightly
Ensure that you can rea
wheel.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
airbag can provide the greatest
he event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the front
ger seat back as far as possible .
n upright position so that your backrests
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head page 13.
otwell in front of the front passenger seat.
ecurely page 19.
e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
r seat page 136.
tion of the front passenger can lead to severe
er seat so that there is at least 25 cm between el. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the t you properly.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fasten your seat belt securely page 19.
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat page 133.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 oclock and 3 oclock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 oclock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the
possible protection in t
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
passenger:
Move the front passen
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt s
It is possible to deactivate th
stances page 25.
Adjusting the front passenge
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posi injuries.
Adjust the front passeng your chest and the dash pan airbag system cannot protec
Safe driving12
otwell in front of the rear seat.
curely page 19.
d restraint system when you take children
6.
ear seat are not sitting properly, they could
properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
e optimal protection when backrests are in an engers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the seat belt increases.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The work- shop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet on the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for
use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt se
Use an appropriate chil
in the vehicle page 4
WARNING
If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint tion.
Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pass If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
properly in order to achieve maximum
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at the very least, at eye level
page 133
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could result in death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
d into their seats during a rear end collision. The
e backrest activates the active head restraint*
s rapidly forwards and upwards at the same
the distance between the occupants head and
cing the risk of head injuries such as brain
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint
protection.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 3 and fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passengers height.
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are presse
resulting body pressure on th
on the front seat, which move
time. This movement reduces
the head restraint, thus redu
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
ar seat head restraints
restraints are an important part of the
d can reduce the risk of injuries in
s
Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passengers height.
Note The active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous,
as the active head restraints will return to the original position immediately
and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of re
Properly adjusted head
passenger protection an
most accident situation
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
itting positions
ition can lead to severe injuries to
timal protection only when the belt webs
ncorrect sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t belt position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
assume an incorrect sitting position in the
.
amples of sitting positions that could be
The list is not complete, but we would like to
.
icle is in motion:
,
r to the rear,
sh panel,
h,
e of a seat,
w,
a window,
dash panel,
surface of a seat,
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Rear outer seat head restraints
The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the
head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along
with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use.
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.
Risk of injury in case of an accident!
Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 134.
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting pos
occupants.
Seat belts can provide op
are properly positioned. I
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect sea
responsible for all vehicle
Never allow anyone to
vehicle while travelling
The following list contains ex
dangerous for all occupants.
make you aware of this issue
Therefore, whenever the veh
Never stand in the vehicle
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest fa
never lean against the da
never lie on the rear benc
never sit on the front edg
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a windo
never put your feet out of
never put your feet on the
never put your feet on the
Safe driving16
e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
port your feet properly and give you a good
n can lead to critical situations while driving.
e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving
ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!
side
used which can be securely fastened
ot impair operation of the pedals.
ats are securely fastened during the trip
pedals .
ve the pedals clear and which are secured to
u can obtain suitable floor mats from a special-
r floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-
s are always securely attached.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell,
never travel without wearing the seat belt,
do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incor- rect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects
or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brak
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which sup
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operatio
Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc
Floor mats on the driver
Only floor mats may be
in the footwell and do n
Ensure that the floor m
and do not obstruct the
Only use floor mats which lea
prevent them from slipping. Yo
ised dealership. Fasteners* fo
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructe ries.
Ensure that the floor mat
Safe driving 17
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
he luggage compartment and secure them on
cure heavy objects.
res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicles handling and lead to an acci-
ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.
d axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving e may change, leading to accidents, injuries
unattended, especially when the tailgate is to the luggage compartment, closing the door
apped and run the risk of death.
lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the e are no adults or children in the vehicle.
ers in the luggage compartment. All passen- lt fastened page 19.
le helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
on slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
tion slits are never covered.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment.
Place the heavy objects first.
Secure heavy objects to the fastening rings page 18.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries.
Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.
Use suitable straps to se
During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide
Never exceed the allowe the allowed axle load or the characteristics of the vehicl and damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb in behind them; they will be tr
Never allow children to p the doors and tailgate when vehicle, make sure that ther
Never transport passeng gers must have their seat be
Note Air circulation in the vehic
air escapes through ventilati
ment. Ensure that the ventila
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Safe driving18
age or other objects from flying forward, ing cords which are secured to the fastening
on the fastening rings.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the luggage compart-
ment for fastening luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the
luggage compartment on page 17.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object. The
most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this object strikes an occupant as it flies through
the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be further
increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of luggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappropriate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could be sustained in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents.
To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retain rings.
Never secure a child seat
WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e is approved only for four seats. Two front seats
ble seats must never be transported in your
ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .
*
as a reminder to the driver to fasten
e:
ecurely.
rs to fasten their seat belts properly before
ng a child seat according to the childs
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is
equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicl
and two rear seats.
WARNING
More people than availa vehicle.
Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicl
Fasten your seat belt s
Instruct your passenge
driving off.
Protect children by usi
height and weight.
Seat belts20
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
After the ignition has been switched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
ment panel lights up1) if the driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and an
acoustic signal is heard if the vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h.
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
1) Depending on the model version.
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aws of physics work in the case of a head-on
rts moving fig. 7, a certain amount of energy
oduced in the vehicle and its occupants.
depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
passengers. The higher the speed and the
energy there is to be released in an accident.
owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
ur example are not restrained by seat belts, in
n all of their kinetic energy has to be absorbed
8.
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
ove forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the l
collision: When a vehicle sta
known as kinetic energy is pr
The amount of kinetic energy
weight of the vehicle and its
greater the weight, the more
The most significant factor, h
doubles from 25 km/h to 50
plied by four.
Because the passengers in o
the case of a head-on collisio
at the point of impact fig.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one to
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat
head-on collision, they will m
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
Seat belts22
acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with ones hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
l, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
stitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
tion. All occupants (including the driver) must
g the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe
dent regardless of whether an airbag is fitted
ered only once. To achieve the best possible
always be worn properly so that you will be
h no airbag is deployed.
passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
anger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on
collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the forces
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dash pane
fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a sub
provide only additional protec
wear seat belts properly durin
injuries in the event of an acci
for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be trigg
protection, the seat belt must
protected in accidents in whic
It is also important for the rear
could otherwise be thrown for
who do not use seat belts end
occupants fig. 10.
Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n seat belts before every trip, even when "just
wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
t belts is an effective means of substantially
d improving the chances of survival in a serious
rly worn seat belts improve the protection
ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
most countries.
pped with airbags, the seat belts must be
airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
ns, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
hold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
eir seat belts properly before you drive off!
using seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this section.
lts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the vehicle.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers
have shown that wearing sea
reducing the risk of injury an
accident. Furthermore, prope
provided by airbags in the ev
seat belt is required by law in
Although your vehicle is equi
fastened and worn. The front
frontal accidents. The front a
collisions, minor side collisio
which the airbag trigger thres
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened th
Safety instructions on
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat be
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 11 A driver wearing the seat belt properly is secured by the belt in sharp braking
Seat belts24
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the seat belt is not
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept cl properly page 213.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 24, fig. 12.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or
bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt
is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt
tensioners page 28.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts26
lso fasten their seat belts properly
he unborn child is for the mother to
rly at all times during the pregnancy.
imum protection only when the seat belt
age 25.
d head restraint correctly page 10.
pull the belt evenly across your chest and
the pelvis fig. 15.
to the buckle for the corresponding seat
it is securely locked with an audible click
hat the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Pregnant women must a
The best protection for t
wear the seat belt prope
The seat belt provides max
is properly positioned p
Adjust the front seat an
Holding the latch plate,
as low as possible over
Insert the latch plate in
and push it down until
.
Pull the belt to ensure t
the buckle.
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.
height
ers can be used to adjust the position
houlder.
the front seats can be used to adjust the
shoulder.
Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belt height adjust
of the seat belt at the s
The seat belt adjuster for
proper belt position at the
Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts28
information and warnings concerning the use
rs
t tensioner
, the seat belts on the front seats are
upants are equipped with belt tensioners.
elt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral
f the seat belt is actually being worn. This
belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
triggered only once.
ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns or in situations where no large
rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
ion of fire in the vehicle.
ments must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar
are also available to you.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position page 27, fig. 17.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt page 25.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are respon-
sible for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them for the whole journey.
Read and always observe of seat belts page 23.
Seat belt tensione
Function of the seat bel
During a frontal collision
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occ
Sensors will only trigger the b
and rear collisions, and only i
retracts and tightens the seat
pants.
The seat belt tensioner can be
The seat belt tensioners will n
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side or
Note If the seat belt tensioners
normal and it is not an indicat
The relevant safety require
components of the system are
with these regulations, which
WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 29
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the
seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install
parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt
tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts.
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a specialised workshop only.
The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.
Airbag system30
critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
possible distance between yourself and the
t airbags can completely deploy when trig-
m protection.
at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
d the speed of the vehicle.
red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ollision and detected by the control unit. If the
during the collision and measured by the
specified reference values, the front, side
be triggered. Take into account that the visible
in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
ags to have been triggered.
orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.
hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 l on the rear seat. Never transport children in trained or the restraint system is not appro- eight.
at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.
y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fron
gered, providing their maximu
The most important factors th
dent, the angle of collision an
Whether the airbags are trigge
ation rate resulting from the c
vehicle deceleration occurring
control unit remains below the
and/or curtain airbag will not
damage in a vehicle involved
determining factor for the airb
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat
All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie years old should always trave the vehicle if they are not res priate for their age, size or w
If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by
To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:
assenger airbag page 44, Deactivating
e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.
instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.
ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.
prevent the front passenger seat from being .
nt passenger seat must be in an upright
g and seat belt tensioner
itors the airbag and seat belt
ll airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehicle,
iring connections.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Always adjust the front seats properly.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated. The
front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transported in a
rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the
rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a
If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi
Deactivate the front p airbags*.
The child seat must b use on a front passenger
Follow the installation turer and observe the sa
Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb
Ensure that no objects pushed completely back
The backrest of the fro position.
Warning lamp for airba
This warning lamp mon
tensioner system.
The warning lamp monitors a
including control units and w
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system32
nd disposal of airbags
are installed in various places in your vehicle.
rbag system or parts have to be removed and
forming other repair work, parts of the airbag
e event of an accident this could cause the
not inflate at all.
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
ith these requirements.
ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.
hing on the steering wheel hub or the surface enger side of the dash panel, and do not
ny way.
ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.
el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to
triggered, plastic parts could become
djust, remove or install parts of the airbag
stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should lised workshop. Specialised workshops have formation and qualified personnel.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly monitored
electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp
lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel* shows
AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a specialised workshop check
the system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Repairs, maintenance a
The parts of the airbag system
If work is carried out on the ai
fitted on the system when per
system may be damaged. In th
airbag to inflate incorrectly or
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
disposal centres are familiar w
WARNING
If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate
Do not cover or stick anyt of the airbag unit on the pass obstruct or modify them in a
It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf
To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleaners contain become porous. If the airbag detached and cause injuries.
Never attempt to repair, a system.
Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a specia the necessary tools, repair in
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
For the sake of the environment The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system34
is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and
ger is located in the dash panel fig. 19.
ord AIRBAG.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
on for the head and chest in the event of a
e 37, Safety notes on the front airbag system.
ction of restraining the occupants, the seat
ront passenger in a position where the airbags
ion in a frontal collision.
stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
e safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
e seat belts at all times, not only because this
ntries, but also for your safety page 19,
bag system are:
onitoring system (control unit)
ag with gas generator) for the driver and front
instrument panel page 31
s monitored electronically. The airbag warning
onds every time the ignition is switched on
if the warning lamp :
ignition is switched on page 31
ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
p again after the ignition is switched on,
he vehicle is moving.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver
the airbag for the front passen
Airbags are identified by the w
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protecti
severe frontal collision pag
In addition to their normal fun
belts also hold the driver and f
can provide maximum protect
The airbag system is not a sub
of the vehicles overall passiv
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have a
it is most important to wear th
is required by law in most cou
Brief introduction.
The main parts of the front air
an electronic control and m
the two front airbags (airb
passenger,
a warning lamp on the
The airbag system operation i
lamp will light up for a few sec
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system
does not light up when the
after the ignition is switch
turns off and then lights u
lights up or flashes while t
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ags
the risk of head or chest injury.
d so that the airbags for the driver and front
severe frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed
movement of the front occupants and help to
e head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
allow visibility.
rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor frontal collision,
there is a side collision,
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli- sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airb
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designe
passenger are triggered in a
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward
reduce the risk of injury to th
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
airbag deflates sufficiently to
The airbags deploy extremely
provide additional protection
Airbag system36
. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags are triggered fig. 21. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig are
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ags
t a substitute for the seat belts.
ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat
side airbags are located in the rear wheel
are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
n the rear wheel housing lining.
the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
or the upper body in the event of a severe side
notes on the operation of the side airbag
rbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the body facing the impact. In addition to their
the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airb
The airbag system is no
The front side airbags are loc
backrests fig. 22. The rear
housing lining. The locations
region of the backrests and i
Together with the seat belts,
pants additional protection f
collision page 40, Safety
system.
In a side collision, the side ai
the front seats to the areas of
normal function of protecting
Airbag system38
door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.
the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been
enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.
e doors should be made in a specialised work-
s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for
he airbag system, have the system checked workshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, r, or not trigger correctly.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicles overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety page 19, Brief introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off
there is a minor side collision
there is a frontal collision
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side
airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing
a warning lamp on the instrument panel page 31
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for approx. 4seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct
Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.
Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted
Any work carried out to th shop.
The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.
If a fault has occurred in t immediately by a specialised the system may fail to trigge
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Operation of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system40
incorrect sitting position, they expose them- injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.
ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults system operation.
components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
ly. All work carried out on the front door must kshop.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbags effectiveness page 214, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
When children assume an selves to an increased risk of particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio
Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by may occur during the airbag
Do not attempt to modify
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a specialised wor
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
untries, but also for your safety page 19,
airbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit)
gs with gas generator) for the driver, front
n the rear seats,
instrument panel page 31
is monitored electronically.
ll not be triggered if:
ff
g. 24 Location of head airbags on the left side of the hicle
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicles overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most co
Brief introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and
the curtain airbags (airba
passenger and passengers o
a warning lamp on the
The airbag system operation
The curtain airbag system wi
the ignition is switched o
Fi ve
Airbag system42
e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
vers the side windows and door pillars.
rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
oys. This is normal and it is not an indication of
hion the movement of the front occupants and
y to the upper body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
ration of the curtain airbag system
tly, they can considerably reduce the
ds of accident.
gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts
rtain airbag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
there is a frontal collision
there is a rear-end collision
the vehicle turns over
there is a minor side collision
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions th
of the vehicle fig. 25.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered,
process, the curtain airbag co
The airbags deploy extremely
provide additional protection
develop when the airbag depl
fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cus
help to reduce the risk of injur
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the ope
If you use airbags correc
risk of injury in many kin
WARNING
In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the cu vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 214, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a specialised workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system44
g is deactivated, only the front airbag is
irbags in the vehicle remain activated.
senger airbag
in the key operated switch in the glove
sition OFF fig. 26.
lamp OFF on the instrument panel
en the ignition is switched on .
nger airbag
the key-operated switch in the glove
sition ON fig. 26.
Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Deactivating airbags*
Front passenger airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airba
deactivated. All the other a
Deactivating the front pas
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition switch
compartment to the po
Check that the warning
fig. 27 remains lit wh
Activating the front passe
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition key in
compartment to the po
Fig. 26 In the glove compartment: switch for activating and deacti- vating the front passenger airbag
Airbag system 45
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
key to activate/deactivate the front passenger nger airbag will be activated/deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel
page 44, fig. 27 does not light up when the ignition is
switched on .
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 46, Child safety.
Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Otherwise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is necessary to trans- port a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
When using the ignition airbag, only the front passe side airbag and head airbag
WARNING (continued)
Child safety46
the manufacturers Child Seat instruction
oard documentation.
hild seats
s substantially reduces the risk of
onsible for any children you transport in
properly using the appropriate child
seat belt is properly positioned according
ided by the manufacturer of the child
allow children to distract you from traffic.
uring long trips. Take a break at least
facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could lead to a es to the child! However, if it is necessary, in rt a child in the front passenger seat, the front s be disabled page 44, Deactivating
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons,
the child seat should be installed in the centre of the rear seat or behind the
front passenger seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do
not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-
dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke2).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturers instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to include
manual together with the on-b
Safety notes on using c
Proper use of child seat
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are resp
your vehicle.
Protect your children by
seats page 48.
Always ensure that the
to the instructions prov
seat.
When travelling, do not
Take breaks regularly d
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a risk of potentially fatal injuri exceptional cases, to transpo passenger airbag must alway2) Not for all countries.
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aximum protection only when the seat belt is 24, Seat belts.
py a child seat page 48, Child seats.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other passengers.
If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly important if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.
A suitable child seat can protect your child!
Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehicle.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor collision or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
The seat belt provides m properly positioned page
Only one child may occu
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Child safety48
ats
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
child.
t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 28.
ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
the manufacturers Child Seat instruction
oard documentation.
ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child se
A suitable child seat and
help you to protect your
Group 0: For babies from abou
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from abo
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturers ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to include
manual together with the on-b
WARNING
Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety
Child safety 49
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
r child.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
e the manufacturers Child Seat instruction
board documentation.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints together
fig. 30.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the rear
of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturers instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include the manufacturers Child Seat instruction
manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Group 2 and 3 child se
A suitable child seat an
help you to protect you
Follow the manufacturers ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to includ
manual together with the on-
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child se
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age w
metres tall are best protected
with properly worn seat belts
Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety50
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Child safety 51
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
n must be secured in the vehicle with a age, weight and size.
facing backwards on the front passenger seat irbag has been disabled. This could cause fatal r, if, in exceptional cases, it is necessary to passenger seat, the front passenger airbag
irbags* must always be disabled and the seat tion, where possible.
information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 46.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Group 0, 0+ and 1 child seats with the ISOFIX system can be secured to
the ISOFIX retaining rings. In this case, seat belts are not necessary.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt).
*: Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as
possible and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.
WARNING
When travelling, childre restraint system suitable for
Never install a child seat unless the front passenger a injuries to the child! Howeve transport a child in the front page 44, Deactivating a adjusted to its highest posi
Read and always observe of child seats in Safe
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front passen- ger
Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Child safety52
e child seat, please be sure to follow the
s.
rear as it will go.
o the ISOFIX retaining rings until the child
gage securely. If the child seat is
er* anchor points, secure it to the corre-
. Observe the manufacturers instruc-
e child seat to ensure that it is secure.
fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
ame and, in others, they are secured to the rear
X rings is between the rear seat backrest and
ether* anchors are located at the rear of the
or in the luggage compartment).
d Top Tether* attachment system are available
entres.
signed only for use with ISOFIX and Top
that do not have the ISOFIX and Top Tether* er objects to the securing rings this could
ries to the child!
is secured correctly using the ISOFIX and Top
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Child seats fastened with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system
Child seats with the ISOFIX or Top Tether* system can be
secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear outer seats.
When removing or fitting th
manufacturers instruction
Move the seat as far to
Press the child seat ont
seat can be heard to en
equipped with Top Teth
spondent ring fig. 32
tions.
Pull on both sides of th
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are
rings are secured to the seat fr
floor. The access to the ISOFI
the seat cushioning. The Top T
backs seats (behind the seat
Child seats with the ISOFIX an
from the Authorised Service C
WARNING
The securing rings are de Tether* child seats.
Never secure child seats system, retaining belts or oth result in potentially fatal inju
Ensure that the child seat Tether* securing rings.
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings
Fig. 32 Top Tether* securing ring
53
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
54
Fig. 3
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
3 Dash panel
Cockpit 55
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ated front passenger airbag . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nsole:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing
er socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
itch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
losing the front windows . . . . . . . .
r windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
closing the rear windows . . . . . . . .
162
137
44
30
140
175
145
96
189
149
131
180
120
170
168
219
110
110
110
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Operating Instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the dash panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system*
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ Driver front airbag
Windscreen wiper and washer lever and operation of the
multifunction display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic* . . . . . .
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating butto
Warning lamp for deactiv
Front passenger airbag
Glove compartment leve
Selector lever . . . . . . . .
Cup holder compartmen
Controls on the centre co
Central locking . . . .
ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitor
Cigarette lighter / Pow
Exterior mirror adjustm
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning light sw
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . .
Steering column control
Handle for releasing the
Button for opening and c
Safety switch* for the rea
Control* for opening and
A1
A2 115
A3 119
A4 119
A5
A6 121, 183
A7 88
A8
57
60
76
A9 30
A10
126, 62
A11 137
A12
156
158
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
Cockpit56
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model
versions or are optional extras.
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
g. 34 Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument nel
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of the dash panel: instrument panel
Fuel gauge page 58
Multifunction display
Engine coolant temperature gauge page 58
Rev counter page 59
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 59
Speedometer
Fi pa
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit58
ture gauge
ngine coolant temperature.
heavy engine loads fig. 36.
the needle should be in the middle section of
y also rise when the engine is working hard,
peratures. This is no cause for concern as long
light up and no warning message* appears on
, fig. 49 will light up if the needle is in the
arning message appears on the instrument
Fig. 36 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge
A2
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve area fig. 35 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light up and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears on the instrument panel display 3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX].*
Engine coolant tempera
This gauge shows the e
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions,
the scale. The temperature ma
especially at high outside tem
as the warning lamp does not
the instrument panel display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 76
warning zone. The following w
3) Depending on the model version.
Fig. 35 Instrument panel: fuel gauge
AA
AB
AC
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nvironment s early will help you to reduce fuel consumption,
ine noise.
d with a digital odometer and a trip recorder, in
s display.
the instructions shown on page 195 should
k*
ted in the instrument panel display.
page 57, fig. 34 clockwise until the
our. The hour will flash. To change the
.
lockwise to the second click to set the
ill flash. To change the minutes, press the
A5
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
panel display 4). Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the
coolant level page 226 .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 219.
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone page 57, fig. 34 indicates the maximum
engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to
change up to a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the
accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gear
emissions and minimise eng
Speedometer
The speedometer is equippe
addition to a service interval
During the running-in period,
be followed.
Setting the digital cloc
The digital clock is loca
Turn the setting knob first click to set the h
hour, press the button
Turn the setting knob c
minutes. The minutes w
button.
4) Depending on the model version.
A4
Cockpit60
ment panel shows the mileage and
he selector lever position.
On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-
atic gearbox*. The actual position of the
which is engaged (for tiptronic) is highlighted.
tomatic displays in this field.
those on the multifunction display (MFI)
rmation and warning messages.
nformation and which can be used to make
shown: Instrument panel menus
ice interval display.
Fig. 38 Digital instru- ment panel display
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Digital instrument panel display
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display page 59. On the right of the display: Selector
lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of
the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for tiptronic)* is high-
lighted.
Outside temperature.
Odometer or flexible service interval display*.
Displayed categories*
The display on the instru
trip recorder as well as t
Clock: Setting the time.
tion display for the autom
selector lever or the gear
There are optional and au
Optional indicators: e.g.
Automatic indicators: Info
Menus providing further i
diverse settings are also
Outside temperature:
Odometer or flexible serv
Fig. 37 Detailed view of the instrument panel: screen with different indi- cators
A1
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
A4
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s dependent on time/distance travelled already
set. The intervals are calculated individually in
e.
nly indicates the dates of services that include
of all other services, such as Inspection Service
r in the sticker on the door pillar or in the Main-
pear in the odometer if a service is due soon. A
nd the display km with the distance that can
ce appointment is due. The display will change
ds. A clock symbol appears and the number
intment should be carried out. The following
rument panel display*:
ppear approximately 20 seconds after the igni-
ine is running. The normal display can be
e reset button on the trip counter or by pressing
g wheel controls.
check the current service message at any
menu or turning the reset button to access the
d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should
change up or down.
Odometer or flexible service interval display
Odometer
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down
the reset button for a few seconds.
Service interval display
Vehicles with Service interval have certain service intervals
vehicles with LongLife servic
The service interval display o
engine oil change. The dates
or brake fluid change, appea
tenance Programme.
A Service pre-warning will ap
spanner symbol appears a
be driven until the next servi
after approximately 10 secon
of days until the service appo
message is shown in the inst
Service in [XXXX] km or
[XXXX] days
The service message will disa
tion is switched on or the eng
resumed by briefly pressing th
the button on the steerin
With the ignition on, you can
moment in the Vehicle status service display.
An overdue service is indicate
information.
Fig. 39 Gear display
OK
Cockpit62
FI)*
y (MFI) shows you information on the
ption.
Fig. 40 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 41 Digital instru- ment panel display
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Indications for vehicles with LongLife service
Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing
requirements. With the LongLife System, SEAT ensures that your vehicle only
has an interval service when it is necessary. The length of the service intervals
(max. two years) is determined by factors such as conditions under which the
vehicle is used and personal driving style.
The service pre-warning will first appear 20 days before the date on which the
service is due. The distance travelled is rounded off to the nearest 100 km
and the time to full days. The current service message can only be consulted
500 km after the last service. Until that time, only dashes are displayed.
Note If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indi-
cated after 15,000 km or one year and will not be calculated individually.
Do not reset the display between service intervals as the display will
otherwise be incorrect.
In LongLife Service vehicles, if the battery is disconnected for a long
period, the days remaining until the next service cannot be calculated. There-
fore, the service message displays on the instrument panel may be incorrect.
Take into account the maximum authorised service intervals.
Multifunction display (M
The multifunction displa
journey and fuel consum
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tifunction display (MFI)*
ollowing displays in the multifunction display
tch fig. 42 on the windscreen wiper lever.
Fig. 42 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 43 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.
AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The multifunction system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
When the ignition is on, briefly press button page 62, fig. 40
on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to
another or press button on the steering wheel controls
page 62, fig. 40.
Resetting a memory
Select the memory that you would like to reset.
Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button
on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.
The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Information in the mul
You can switch between the f
(MFI) by operating rocker swi
AA
AA
AA AA
Cockpit64
ing the figures for tank content and current fuel
r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
sumption
will be shown page 63, fig. 43 after a
metres has been travelled. Until then dashes
display will be updated every 5 seconds while
mount of fuel used will not be shown.
consumption
ent fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
our when the vehicle is in a stationary position
how your driving style affects fuel consump-
ds from -45 C to +58 C. At temperatures
bol is displayed and a warning sounds if the
20 km/h (ice danger warning). This symbol
s and remains lit until the outside temperature
as already lit.
peed, enter the speed indicator mode and
he display remembers the indicated speed. If
ed, a warning message is displayed on the
al is given.
essing the button (Reset).
on, the message on the screen may vary and may be
speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Memory displays
Driving speed
Journey duration
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Outside temperature display
Speed warning
Km/h - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown in the display.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
km/h - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately
100 metres. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The display will be
updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated us
consumption. It shows how fa
tions as a reference.
l/100 km - Average fuel con
The average fuel consumption
distance of approximately 100
will appear in the display. The
the vehicle is in motion. The a
l/100 km or l/h - Current fuel
The display will show the curr
vehicle is in motion or in litre/h
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see
tion page 197.
Outside temperature display
The measurement range exten
below +4 C, an ice crystal sym
vehicle is moving at more than
will flash for about 10 second
rises above +4 C or 6 C if it w
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required s
press the button (Reset), t
the indicated speed is exceed
screen 5) and an acoustic sign
This may be deactivated by pr
5) Depending on the model versi
represented by flashing of the
AA
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
t warning or information texts, faults are indi-
ing lamps.
ty 1 (red)
the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
ible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
cessary.
detected at the same time, the symbols will be
for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
e display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
g messages (red)
with warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID OP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
he warning message STOP SEE COOLANT
ol with the warning message STOP ENGINE CTION MANUAL.
ty 2 (yellow)
he warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
unction should be checked as soon as possible.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. For this reason you should not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information message in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
cated by symbols with warning or information messages in the display. An
acoustic warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2)
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note In the case of screens withou
cated exclusively by the warn
Warning reports, Priori
If one of these faults occurs,
be accompanied by three aud the vehicle and switch off the
professional assistance if ne
If several priority 1 faults are
displayed one after the other
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in th
message.
Examples of priority 1 warnin
Brake system symbol
INSTRUCTION MANUAL or ST
Coolant symbol with t
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symb
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRU
Warning reports, Priori
If one of these faults occurs, t
by one audible warning. The f
AB
Cockpit66
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If several priority 2 warning messages are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
messages have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning messages (yellow):6)
Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
page 228.
6) Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ning will be used as an example of how to
ood idea if you are, for example, using
suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
ith the MFI lever
for two seconds to return to main menu
y be necessary to repeat this operation
displayed.
uration with the MFI lever
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
ll also be a triangle on the right.
tion.
Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Instrument panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according
to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may
vary according to the version of the model.
The setting of a speed war
use the menus. This is a g
winter tyres which are not
1. Open the main menu w
Switch the ignition on.
Hold down button
from other menu. It ma
until the main menu is
2. Open the menu Config
To choose an option fro
of the rocker switch. Th
two lines and there wi
Select menu Configura
Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu
AB
Cockpit68
ipment one or more of these menus will be
unction ame of menu displayed
he current set speed is displayed
r dashes will be shown if the function is deac-
vated.
the function is activated or deactivated
he set value increases by 10 km/h
he set value decreases by 10 km/h
he menu Winter tyres is closed and the last
isplayed menu is shown.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.
2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls
To access the Configuration menu, press button
page 67, fig. 45 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in
this menu.
3. Open the main menu Winter tyres
Select option Winter tyres using switch .
Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
Use button to select the option +10 km/h or 10 km/h and
press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed
warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu Winter tyres
In the menu select Back.
The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu Winter tyres
Note For electronic and vehicle equ
displayed.
AA
AC
AB
AA
AB
AB
AB
In the menu Winter tyres
F N
X km/h T
or --- o
ti
On / Off If
+10 km/h T
-10 km/h T
Back T
d
Cockpit 69
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ct button for at least two seconds. It
peat this operation until the main menu is
ain menu
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
ect the entry.
e 67
Function
e to the multifunction display (MFI): Multi-
n display (MFI)
enu displays the available information for the
audio source (radio station, CD audio track /
USB / iPod / Bluetooth audioa) / call
ationa).
enu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
ation system. The navigation system must be
ed on. When the route guidance is activated,
ning arrows and proximity bars are displayed.
play is similar to that of the Navigation sys-
oute guidance is not activated, the direction of
(compass) and the name of the street along
you are driving are shown.
AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFI lever).
Open main menu
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the eje
may be necessary to re
displayed.
Select a menu from the m
To choose an option fro
of rocker switch . Th
two horizontal lines.
Press button to sel
Example of menu use pag Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever (MFI): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu
Fig. 47 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu
Main menu
Multifunction dis- play
Chang
functio
Audio This m
active
MP3 /
inform
Navigation This m
a navig
switch
the tur
The dis
tem.
If the r
travel
which
AB
AA
Cockpit70
enu (MFI)
y (MFI) shows you information on the
ption.
) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip memory cted memory is shown on the upper right hand
8 at all times.
y menu
isplay menu from the main menu page 69
on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-
ory to another, briefly press button
e 67 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
on lever page 67, fig. 45 page 67 while
n.
Fig. 48 Multifunction display (MFI) instrument panel display.
AA
OK
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multifunction display m
The multifunction displa
journey and fuel consum
The multifunction display (MFI
and 2 - Total memory. The sele
section of the display fig. 4
Open the multifunction displa
Select the Multifunction d and press the button
tion lever*.
Selecting a memory
To change from one mem
page 67, fig. 44 pag
button on the multifuncti
the ignition is switched o
Telephone This menu is only available in vehicles with radio unit
if the vehicle is fitted with the telephone function. In
vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system, this
menu is available in the central unit (navigator)
Booklet SEAT Media System 2.1.
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: Vehicle status menu
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent
heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-
venience menu to be reset.
a) Only in vehicles fitted with a radio navigation system.
OK
Cockpit 71
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
h displays are shown on the instrument panel
ifunction Display Data from the Configuration
ated or deactivated individually by marking the
the button on the windscreen wiper lever or
eel*.
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
n both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
ly be deleted once this value has been reached.
l/100 km or l/h
ent fuel consumption in litres/100 km whilst the
s/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary posi-
e how your driving style affects fuel consump-
0 km
will be shown after a distance of approximately
d. Until then dashes will appear in the display.
very five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
not be shown.
sing the figures for tank content and current fuel
ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
OK
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Resetting a memory
Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on
the multifunction* steering wheel for at least two seconds.
The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance trav-
elled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch page 67, fig. 44 page 67 on the windscreen wiper
lever or by pressing button or page 67, fig. 45 on the multifunction
steering wheel*.
Duration
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty
Distance
Average speed
Auxiliary speed
Digital display of speed7)
Speed warning at --- km/h
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish whic
display as required:
Select the submenu Mult menu page 73.
The displays can be activ
required option and pressing
the multifunction steering wh
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value i
The memory will automatical
Current fuel consumption in
The display will show the curr
vehicle is in motion or in litre
tion with the engine running.
Using this display you can se
tion.
Average consumption in l/10
The average fuel consumption
100 metres has been travelle
The display will be updated e
The amount of fuel used will
Fuel range in km
The fuel range is calculated u
consumption. It shows how f
tions as a reference.
7) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.
AA OK
AB
Cockpit72
es from -40 C (-40 F) to +50 C (+125 F). At
4 C (+39.2 F), the snowflake symbol (ice
dition to the outside temperature display. This
nds and remains lit until the outside tempera-
F).
e road surface even if the snowflake symbol you should not rely exclusively on this display
ent panels; therefore the multifunction display
ary or travelling at very low speeds, the
slightly higher than the actual outside temper-
diated from the engine.
on steering wheel* do not have buttons on the
ultifunction display can only be controlled from
on steering wheel*.
ng or information texts
enu
le status from the main menu: Main
n on the windscreen wiper lever OK AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Distance travelled in km
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Until then dashes will appear in the display. The
display will be updated every five seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
Alternative speed display (mph or km/h)
The speed is also displayed in a second unit of measurement other than that
used on the speedometer.
Select the menu Configuration using the rocker switch on the windscreen
wiper lever or the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel* page 67.
Select the option Auxiliary speed and press on the windscreen wiper
lever or the multifunction steering wheel*.
Digital display of speed
The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format7).
Speed warning at --- km/h
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*
to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected
speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset
the speed between 30 km/h and 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons
or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait
five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set
speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is
displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored
speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.
Outside temperature display
The measurement margin rang
outside temperatures below +
danger warning) appears in ad
symbol flashes for a few seco
ture rises above +6 C (+42.8
WARNING
There could be black ice on th is not shown. For this reason - Risk of accident!
Note There are different instrum
may vary.
When the vehicle is station
temperature displayed may be
ature as a result of the heat ra
Vehicles with a multifuncti
windscreen wiper lever. The m
the buttons on the multifuncti
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warni
Open Vehicle Condition m
Select the option Vehic menu and press butto
page 69, fig. 46. or
OK
OK
AA
AB
OK
OK
Cockpit 73
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Function
is menu is used to establish the data in the
ultifunction display menu to be displayed on
e instrument panel page 70
is menu allows you to make the settings for
e convenience functions in the vehicle.
m this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-
lighting settings.
e hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-
tion system can be changed. Choose between
and 24-hour format and change to summer
e.
e menu allows the setting of a speed at which
optical and acoustic warning will be given by
e system. You can use this function, for exam-
e, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not
ited for the top speed of your vehicle. Please
e the section Wheels and tyres.
e display texts and the navigation system texts
n be seen in different languages.
is option allows you to select the units for dis-
aying temperature, fuel consumption values
d distances.
e instrument panel also displays the speed in
other different unit of measurement (mph or
/h) to that given on the speedometer.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 67, fig. 45 until the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
Priority 2 warning messages and information texts: Information and warning
messages on the screen will automatically disappear from the screen after a
time and will be stored in the Vehicle status menu.
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no
warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.
If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use page 67
Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 67, fig. 44 on the wind-
screen wiper lever. or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use page 67
OK AA
Displayed on the screen
Multifunction display data.
Th
m
th
Convenience Th
th
Lights and visibility Fro
cle
Time Th
ga
12
tim
Winter tyres Th
an
th
pl
su
se
Settings: Language Th
ca
Units Th
pl
an
Aux. Speed Th
an
km
Cockpit74
venience from the main menu and press
indscreen wiper lever.
67
ipment one or more of these menus will be
Function
door: Individual unlocking activated.
. locking: the doors are automatically locked
the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
m/h.
unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key
oved from the ignition.
ing and closing electric windows: this deter-
s whether to open or close all the windows
the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
tion can also be activated for the driver door
chronised adjustment is selected, when the
r side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passen-
xterior mirror is also moved.
anufacturers predefined values for the func-
of this menu are restored.
returns to the Configuration menu
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button page 67, fig. 44 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Choose the option Con the button on the w
Example of menu use page
Note For electronic and vehicle equ
displayed.
Inter Service Consult service messages and reset service inter-
val display here.
Factory settings The manufacturers predefined values for the
functions of this menu are restored.
Backa) This returns to the main menu
a) Only if the windscreen wiper lever is used (MFI).
OK AA
Displayed on the screen
Open door One
Auto
when
15 k
Auto
is rem
Elec. window control Open
mine
when
func
only.
Exterior mirror adjust. If syn
drive
ger e
Factory settings The m
tions
Back This
AA
Cockpit 75
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
uipment one or more of these menus will be
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 67 on the windscreen
wiper lever. or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 67, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use page 67
Note For electronic and vehicle eq
displayed.
Displayed on the screen
Function
Coming Home/ Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time
during which the headlights remain lit after the
vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to
be connected and disconnected
Indicator conf. The convenience turn signal function can be acti-
vated or deactivated here. With the convenience
mode activated, the turn signal will blink at least
three times when turned on.
Factory settings The manufacturers predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
OK AA
AA
Cockpit76
. 49 Instrument panel indicator and warning lamps. e of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only
certain model versions or are optional extras.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig Som on
Cockpit 77
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
belt tensioner system fault or
sabled
page 28
page 31
ctive page 84
e applied,
fluid level or
rake system
page 84
l pressure
page 85
g: engine oil sensor faulty
ins lit: insufficient engine oil
ntrol system switched on page 85
n indicator page 85
lit: TCS disabled
page 86
page 87
page 169
chanical steering page 85
e emission control system page 86
g: Electronic Stability Pro-
(ESP) or the TCS is working
ins lit: ESP or TCS faulty
page 86
page 87
page 169
ever lock (automatic gearbox) page 87
ng of indicator and warning lamps
Further infor- mation
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Item Symbol Meaning of indicator and warning
lamps Further infor-
mation
Fuel level / reserve page 79
Coolant level / coolant temperature page 80
Rear fog light switched on page 80
Turn signals in operation page 80
Engine fault (petrol engine) page 81
Glow plug system for diesel engine page 81
Main beam switched on page 81
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine
particulate filter page 81
ABS system fault page 82
Windscreen washer fluid level page 82
Alternator fault page 82
Fasten seat belts! page 19
Brake pad worn page 83
Tyre pressure page 83
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
Airbag or
airbag di
Bulb defe
Handbrak
low brake
fault in b
Red: Engine oi
Yellow: If flashin If it rema
Cruise co
Door ope
If it stays
Electrome
Fault in th
If flashin gramme
If it rema
Selector l
Item Symbol Meani
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
Cockpit78
etected at the same time, the symbols will be
or about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
g messages (red)
ith the warning message STOP BRAKE FLUID AKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
e warning message STOP SEE COOLANT
l with the warning message STOP ENGINE TION MANUAL.
ellow)
e warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
k the corresponding function as soon as
may be used without risk.
essages are detected at the same time, the
er the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
t will disappear and the symbol will be shown
e display.
ill not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
th!
g messages (yellow):8)
information text PLEASE REFUEL.
ymbol with the information text REFILL Top up the washer fluid level.
n.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
WARNING
Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to prevent danger to third parties.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 219.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information messages in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information
message will also appear on the screen.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning
symbols (priority 2)
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the vehicle and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain
professional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are d
displayed one after the other f
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the
message.
Examples of priority 1 warnin
Brake system symbol w
SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BR
Coolant symbol with th
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symbo
OIL PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUC
Warning reports, Priority 2 (y
If one of these faults occurs, th
by one audible warning. Chec
possible although the vehicle
If several priority 2 warning m
symbols are displayed one aft
a set time, the information tex
as a reminder at the side of th
Priority 2 warning messages w
messages have been dealt wi
Examples of priority 2 warnin
Fuel warning light with the
Windscreen washer fluid s
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
8) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 79
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
o indicate that the fuel tank is under
of fuel remain in the tank. You will also hear a
u to fuel up the fuel tank as soon as possible
s the following message9): PLEASE REFUEL!.
t-Stop system activated. Vehicle in Stop mode.
t-Stop system activated. Switch off the ignition
e the vehicle.
the engine. Gearbox overheated.
tart the engine, press the brake pedal. Only in
automatic gearbox.
f central locking function activated.
ting mode active. Transmission engaged. Only
th automatic gearbox.
f central locking function activated.
ording the version of the vehicle model.
ion.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Information messages displayed on the screen*
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up t
the reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres
warning signal. It reminds yo
page 216.
The instrument panel display
Messagea) Description
SERVICE The service interval has ended. Take the vehicle to an
authorised service.
Immobiliser system active. The vehicle will not start. Take
the vehicle to an authorised service.
Instrument panel faulty. Take the vehicle to an authorised
service.
CLEAN AIR FILTER
Warning: The air filter must be cleaned
NO KEY Warning: Correct key cannot be found in the vehicle.
Warning: Key battery low. Change the battery.
CLUTCH Warning: Press the clutch to start. In vehicles with manual
gearbox and Start/Stop system.
--> P/N Warning: Place the selector level in P/N to start. Only in vehi-
cles with automatic gearbox.
--> P Warning: Place the selector lever in position P to stop the
engine.
STARTING Warning: The engine starts automatically. Start-Stop system
activated.
START MANUALLY
Warning: The engine must be started manually. Start-Stop
system activated.
ERROR START STOP
Warning: Start-Stop system error.
START STOP IMPOSSIBLE
Warning: Although the Start-Stop system is switched on, the
engine cannot be stopped automatically. Not all the neces-
sary conditions are met
START STOP ACTIVE
Warning: Star
SWITCH OFF Warning: Star
when you leav
STOP TRANSMI-
SSION TOO HOT
Warning: Stop
BRAKE Warning: To s
vehicles with
CHECK SAFELOCK
Notification o
COASTING FUNCTION
Warning: Coas
in vehicles wi
CHECK SAFELOCK
Notification o
a) These messages may vary acc
9) Depending on the model vers
IMMOBILI-
ERROR
KEY BATTERY
SER
Cockpit80
rature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
he earliest opportunity .
ised for technical reasons, move it to a safe engine off, turn the hazard lights on and
ou can see or hear steam or coolant escaping t. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no team or coolant.
is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any ent, switch off the engine and allow it to cool ponding warnings page 219.
hen the rear fog light is switched on . For
e 115.
es when the turn signals are in oper-
al is operating, either the left or right turn
cator lamps will flash at the same time when
switched on.
, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Coolant level* / temperature
The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too
high or if the coolant level is too low.
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does not go out again after a few seconds.
The warning lamp lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving, and
three acoustic warning signals are emitted.
This means that either the coolant level is too low or the coolant temperature
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel displays the following message10): CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL. page 226.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
high if the needle is over the warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, switch the engine off and wait for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunction
of the radiator fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
sary page 255.
If the warning lamp lights up again after driving on for a short distance, stop the vehicle and switch the engine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
or a specialised workshop.
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel displays the following message11): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
First look at the coolant tempe
range, top up with coolant at t
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobil distance from traffic. Turn the place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if y from the engine compartmen longer see or hear escaping s
The engine compartment work in the engine compartm down. Always note the corres
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up w
further information see pag
Turn signals
The indicator lamp flash
ation.
Depending on which turn sign
signal lamp flashes. Both indi
the hazard warning lights are
If any of both turn signals fails
faster than normal. 10) Depending on the model version. 11) Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 81
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ts up when the main beams are on.
hed on once main beams are on or once the
.
page 121.
he diesel engine particulate filter
s up you should help the filter clean itself by
nner.
utes in fourth or fifth gear (automatic gearbox:
0 km/h, with the engine running at approxi-
the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
dicator turns off.
not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (partic-
trol system fault and glow plugs ), take
orkshop to repair the fault.
o the road weather conditions, the terrain and tions should never lead to illegal manoeuvres
ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- o contact with flammable materials under- e there is a risk of fire.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
For further information on the turn signals, please see page 121.
Engine management*
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Glow plug system / Engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Main beam headlights
The indicator lamp ligh
The warning lamp is switc
headlight flasher is operating
For further information see
Soot accumulation in t
If the warning lamp light
driving in the appropriate ma
To do this, drive about 15 min
S gear range) at a speed of 6
mately 2000 rpm. In this way,
cleaning is successful, the in
If the warning lamp does
ulate filter , emission con
the vehicle to a specialised w
WARNING
Always drive according t traffic. Driving recommenda in surrounding traffic.
The diesel engine partic tures; it should not enter int neath the vehicle. Otherwis
Cockpit82
you brake. This could cause the rear to break the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
s up to indicate that the windscreen
ll up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
n on the instrument panel display*12): REFILL
als a fault in the alternator.
when the ignition is switched on. It should go
ed running.
up while driving, the alternator is no longer
ld immediately drive to the nearest specialised
cal equipment that is not absolutely necessary
ttery.
n.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*
A warning lamp monitors the ABS.
The indicator lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
The warning lamp does not go out again after a few seconds
The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving
The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further
information on the ABS go to page 187.
If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
, this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
in the brake system .
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 219, Working in the engine compartment.
If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir page 232, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN mark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain technical assistance.
If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a failure of the ABS system. This could cause the rear
wheels to lock quickly when away. Risk of skidding. Stop
Washer fluid
This warning lamp light
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fi
page 228
The following message is show
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator
This warning lamp sign
The warning lamp lights up
out when the engine has start
If the warning lamp lights
charging the battery. You shou
workshop.
You should avoid using electri
because this will drain the ba
12) Depending on the model versio
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 83
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ged.
because of a load.
under more pressure (for example, driving with
).
now chains.
el is fitted.
changed.
tyre pressure or after changing one or more
must be kept pressed while the ignition is on
ard and the warning lamp goes out.
sive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
must be increased to the recommended value
on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
n, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
mp lights up
ore wheels is much lower than the value set by
rning lamp lights up .
mp flashes
mp flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the
p.
arning lamp lights up, reduce speed immedi- manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and status.
for maintaining correct tyre pressures. For this e regularly checked.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Worn brake pads
If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety reasons,
the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and
the frequency spectrum of each tyre.
The tyre warning lamp13) compares wheel revolutions and with this informa-
tion, the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a
wheel changes, the tyre warning lamp lights up. The wheel diameter
changes when:
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
The tyre structure is dama
The vehicle is unbalanced
The wheels of one axle are
a trailer or on extreme slopes
The vehicle is fitted with s
The temporary spare whe
The wheel on one axle is
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to
wheels, the button fig. 50
until an acoustic signal is he
If the wheels are under exces
heavy load), the tyre pressure
for a full load (see the sticker
system button is pressed dow
The tyre pressure warning la
If the tyre pressure of one or m
the driver, the tyre control wa
The tyre pressure warning la
If the tyre pressure warning la
nearest specialised worksho
WARNING
When the tyre pressure w ately and avoid any sudden and check the tyre pressure
The driver is responsible reason, tyre pressure must b
13) Depending on the model version
Fig. 50 Centre console: tyre monitor system button
Cockpit84
with the handbrake on, the following message
anel display 15): HANDBRAKE ON. You will also
al.
low page 232.
the following message15): STOP BRAKE FLUID
system.
the following message15): BRAKE SYSTEM .
p together with the ABS system warning lamp.
t, read and observe the warnings on
does not go out, or if it lights up when page 232, Brake fluid in the reservoir is p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
lights up together with the ABS warning of the ABS could be out of action. This could quickly when you brake. This could cause the idding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
n.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Under certain circumstances (for example, when driving in a sportslike manner, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre warning lamp may light up or function incorrectly.
Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp lights up after
turning the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicles exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicles exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The instrument panel displays the following message14): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.
Brake system* / handbrake
The warning lamp lights up if the handbrake is applied, if the
brake fluid level falls too low or if there is a fault in the brake
system.
This warning lamp lights up if
the handbrake is on.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
will appear on the instrument p
hear an acoustic warning sign
the brake fluid level is too
The instrument panel displays
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
there is a fault in the brake
The instrument panel displays
FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
This warning lamp can light u
WARNING
Before opening the bonne page 219.
If the brake warning lamp driving, the brake fluid level too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.
If the brake warning lamp lamp , the control function cause the rear wheels to lock rear to break away. Risk of sk assistance.
14) Depending on the model version.
WARNING (continued)
15) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 85
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s or tailgate*
ts up if one of the doors or the tailgate
go off when all the doors are closed correctly.
the ignition is switched off. It should go off
vehicle is locked.
ring*
ing, the level of steering assistance depends on
e steering angle.
t up for a few seconds when the ignition is
once the engine is started.
, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
ly goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
echanical steering system if the lamp does not
vehicle is in motion. The warning lamp may
rs to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indi-
red, seek workshop assistance immediately, as
t working; in this case you should not keep
seek technical assistance. The power steering
s flat or if the engine is off (for example, for
account that you will need considerably more
e vehicle if the power steering is not working
ESP* the function Recommended steering
page 189.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Engine oil pressure
If this warning lamp is red it indicates that the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more
oil page 222.
The instrument panel displays the following message16): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Checking the oil level
If the warning lamp is yellow the engine oil level should be checked as
soon as possible. Top up the oil page 224 at the next opportunity.
Oil level sensor faulty*
If the yellow warning lamp flashes, take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check
the oil level every time you refuel.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
For further information on the cruise control system, see page 183.
Indicator for open door
This warning lamp ligh
is open.
The warning light should
The system also works when
approx. 15 seconds after the
Electromechanical stee
For vehicles with power steer
the vehicles speed and on th
The warning lamp should ligh
switched on. It should go out
If the battery is disconnected
running. The warning light on
There is a fault in the electrom
go out or lights up whilst the
appear in two different colou
cates a minor fault. If it lights
the steering assistance is no
driving. Stop the vehicle and
does not work if the battery i
towing). You should take into
power than normal to steer th
correctly or at all.
For those vehicles fitted with
manoeuvre is included. See
16) Depending on the model version.
Cockpit86
ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake
c cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer
ollowing functions:
P is activated when driving.
y if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
lt should occur in the ABS because the ESP
he ABS.
ts up and stays on after the engine is started,
l system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
ctivated by switching the ignition off and then
goes out, this means the system is fully func-
ion about the disconnection status of the
disconnected after pressing the switch.
DL)*
the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
ramme (ESP)*
icated by the ABS warning lamp . Take the
hop as soon as possible. For further informa-
90, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the
engine checked.
The instrument panel displays the following message17): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
The following message is shown in the instrument panel display: EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)* /
There are two warning lamps for the electronic stability
programme. The lamp provides information concerning
the function and the provides information on the discon-
nection status
Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go
out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
This programme includes the
assist system (BAS), automati
stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp has the f
It flashes when the TCS/ES
It will light up continuousl
It will also come on if a fau
operates in conjunction with t
If the ESP warning lamp ligh
this may mean that the contro
In this case the ESP can be rea
on again. If the warning lamp
tional.
The lamp provides informat system:
It stays lit when the TCS is
Differential lock fault (E
EDL operates along with
Electronic Stability Prog
A malfunction in the EDL is ind
vehicle to a specialised works
tion on the EDL see page 1
17) Depending on the model version.
Cockpit 87
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
* Safe
hes if an unauthorised key is used.
hat deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
erted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
y as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
s the following message18): SAFE. The vehicle
page 171.
started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
icle can only be ensured if genuine SEAT keys
ion.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Traction control system (TCS)* /
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both
lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out
after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
The lamp has the following function:
It flashes when the TCS is on, and the vehicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will remain
lit. It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 187,
Brakes
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:
It stays lit when the TCS is disconnected after pressing the TCS OFF switch.
By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
Operating the foot brake
The brake pedal must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Electronic immobiliser
This warning lamp flas
Inside the key there is a chip t
matically when the key is ins
activated again automaticall
lock.
The instrument panel display
cannot be used in that case
The engine can, however, be
key is used.
Note A perfect operation of the veh
are used.
18) Depending on the model vers
Steering wheel controls88
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Steering wheel controls
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, as well as the
automatic gears*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering
wheel.
Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and
the telephone system from the steering wheel.
Both versions may be used to control the Audio system (Radio, Audio CD,
mp3 CD, iPod19)/USB19)/SD19)) and the Radio navigation system, in which
case they also control the Navigation system.
Version for automatic gearbox*. page 178
19) If fitted in the vehicle.
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Fig. 52 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
AUXa)
Volume up
Volume down
No specific function
No specific function
No specific function
Silence
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*
Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
Search for last station Previous track
Hold down: Rewind
No specific function No specific function
Silence Pause
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls90
Operates on instrument panel display
No specific functiona)
Operates on instrument panel display
No specific functiona)
No specific function
Change menu on instrument panel
No specific function
Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel
Change source
Operates on instrument panel
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
b) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Next preset a) Next track a)
b) Operates on instrument panel display Operates on instrument panel display
Previous preset a) Previous track a)
b) Next preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
b) Previous preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
b) Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu. b) Depending on the model version
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Fig. 54 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
TELEPHONE
up Volume up
down Volume down
function No specific function
function No specific function
ne menu on
t panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
ecognition Enable voice recognition
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up Volume up Volume
Volume down Volume down Volume
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No specific
Search for last station Last track
Hold down: Rewind No specific
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telepho
instrumen
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls92
unction
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
unction
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
ument panel Confirm
ument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-
PLAY menu
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Next preset a) Next track a) No specific f
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No specific f
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls 93
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Fig. 56 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down
specific function No specific function
specific function No specific function
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No specific function No
Search for last station Previous track
Hold down: Rewind No specific function No
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls94
pecific function
Accept incoming call
(press briefly)
Reject incoming call
(press and hold down)
End ongoing call /estab-
lish call (press briefly)
Switch to private mode
(press and hold down)
Redial last number (press
and hold down)a)
ion of voice recog-
n for mobile tele-
connected to the
(if the telephone
s function) / MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile tele-
phone connected to the
system (if the telephone
has this function) / MUTE
tes on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
tes on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
pecific function Change menu on instru-
ment panel
pecific function Change menu on instru-
ment panel
tes on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
tes on instrument
panel
Operates on instrument
panel / No specific func-
tion
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
No specific function No specific function No specific function No s
Activation of voice recogni-
tion for mobile telephone
connected to the system (if
the telephone has this func-
tion) / MUTE
Activation of voice recognition
for mobile telephone con-
nected to the system (if the tel-
ephone has this function) /
MUTE
Activation of voice recog-
nition for mobile tele-
phone connected to the
system (if the telephone
has this function) / MUTE
Activat
nitio
phone
system
has thi
Next preset b) Next track b) No specific function Opera
Previous preset b) Previous track b) No specific function Opera
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No s
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No s
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls 95
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
edia System 2.1)
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
a) For a more detailed description of how to use this button, please refer to the Radio navigation System User Handbook (SEAT M b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Unlocking and locking96
04, fig. 62 on the remote control to lock all
urn the key in the door to lock all doors and the
sabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
ay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle y high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors ehicle.
with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse hildren, may result in serious damage and
ntally be started and be out of control.
ed on, the electric equipment could be acti- or example, in the electric windows.
d using the remote control key. This could n emergency situation.
th you when you leave the vehicle.
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The engage, and you would not be able to turn the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
doors by just pushing the button.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver door cylinder and rotating it manu-
ally,
the central locking button in the vehicle interior page 99.
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key,
page 104
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
Safe locking system
Selective unlocking system*
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button page 104, fig. 62 on the remote control to unlock all
the doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle*
Press button page 1
doors and the tailgate or t
tailgate.
WARNING
Never leave children or di gency, they may not be able own.
Never allow children to pl can be subjected to extremel the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the v
Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by c accident.
The engine may accide
If the ignition is switch vated with risk of injury, f
The doors can be locke make the aid difficult in a
Always take the key wi
Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenly steering wheel.
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
en the vehicle is locked
n on the remote control twice within
cle is locked without activating the dead-
arning lamp flashes for approx. two
s out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts
nd opened from the inside if the Safe deadlock
ill have to pull the door release lever once.
tion is off, the anti-theft alarm* remains active.
g system* and the anti-tow system are deacti-
vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an
stem*
cking either just the driver door or the
ss the unlock button on the remote once. The
is deactivated, only the driver door is unlocked
arning lamp are also turned off.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note While the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the
remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
If the driver door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
on, the door deadlock function is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 99.
If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver door warning
lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
For anti-theft security, only the driver door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safe security system
The Safe deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking
button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating deadlock
Press once the locking button on the remote control. or
Turn the key once in the driver door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the Safe deadlock is
working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at
short intervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating deadlock wh
Press the locking butto
two seconds. The vehi
lock. The driver door w
seconds and then goe
flashing again.
The doors can be unlocked a
has not been activated. You w
When the Safe deadlock func
The vehicle interior monitorin
vated*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.
Selective unlocking sy
This system allows unlo
entire vehicle.
Using the remote control, pre
Safe system for all the vehicle
and both the alarm and the w
Unlocking and locking98
m for involuntary unlocking*
and prevents the unintentional
.
any of the doors (including the tailgate) are
gets re-locked automatically. This function
aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed
stem
ing an accident, the vehicle is unlocked, except
It is possible to lock the vehicle from inside
turning the ignition off and back on again.
m the outside, see Emergency locking of the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Unlocking all doors and the luggage compartment
The unlock button on the remote control must be pressed twice so that all
doors and the luggage compartment can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for the entire
vehicle, to unlock all doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning
lamp and the alarm (only vehicles fitted with one) are turned off.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle
from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the tailgate are automatically locked when vehicle speed
exceeds 15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will
be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the igni-
tion.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.
Automatic locking syste
It is an anti-theft system
unlocking of the vehicle
If the vehicle is unlocked and
opened within 30 seconds, it
prevents the vehicle from rem
by mistake.
Emergency unlocking sy
If the airbags are triggered dur
for the luggage compartment.
with the central locking, after
If the doors must be locked fro
doors
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nt passenger door cannot be locked if any of the
gate) are open. This avoids the user from forget-
.
e central locking will deactivate the central
s. Once this time has passed, the button if oper-
ng the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
button when the driver door is closed and any of
ng any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and
parately from inside the vehicle. Do this by
r once.
hildren and disabled people may be trapped
n is not operative in the following cases:
d from the outside (with the remote control or
activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
tton .
ton .
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Central locking button
The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from the inside.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the Safe security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking
button:
For safety reasons it is not possible to open the doors or the tailgate from
the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).
The driver door and/or fro
vehicle doors (except the tail
ting his key inside the vehicle
Repeated operation of th
locking button for 30 second
ative again.
There is a danger of leavi
locked by the central locking
the rear doors open. On closi
the keys remain inside it.
All doors can be locked se
pulling the door release leve
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, c inside it.
The central locking butto
When the vehicle is locke the key).
While the ignition is not with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, amber bu
Vehicle unlocked, red but
Fig. 57 Detailed view of the centre console: central locking button
Unlocking and locking100
ing
l locking of the doors in case of
ailure.
ally
cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
ti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
d it can no longer be opened from the outside.
f the remaining doors
cap fig. 58 printed with a lock image.
ent with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
element clockwise for the right hand side doors
hand side doors.
door. Once the door has been closed it can no
tside.
Fig. 58 Locking the doors manually
AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Unlocking and locking - Manual personalisation
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s
The turn signal lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
Emergency manual lock
This permits mechanica
central locking system f
Locking the driver door manu
Insert the key in the door lock
the left hand side door and an
Once the door has been close
Manual (emergency) locking o
Open the door and remove the
This will expose a circular elem
into the groove and rotate the
and anticlockwise for the left
Replace the cap and close the
longer be opened from the ou
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
vents the rear doors from being
. This system prevents minors from
tally while the vehicle is running.
Fig. 59 Childproof lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 60 Childproof lock on the right hand side door
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Unlocking the manually (emergency) locked driver door
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
hand side doors and clockwise for the right hand side doors.
The door lock is released and the door may be opened using the exterior door
handle.
Unlocking the remaining manually (emergency) locked doors
First the driver door must be unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate the
internal door handle for the required door. If the childproof lock is activated
on the rear doors, when the interior door release lever is operated the door is
unlocked but does not open. The door must be opened from the outside.
Note Once the vehicle is open, if you wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
repeat the previous instructions.
Childproof lock
The childproof lock pre
opened from the inside
opening a door acciden
Unlocking and locking102
a remote control, a key without a
stic key tab*
our vehicle consists of the following items:
fig. 61 with folding key bit,
ntrol ,
, go to an Authorised Service Centre with your
Fig. 61 Set of keys
AA
AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and
locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated
and deactivated manually, as described below:
Activating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti-
vate the childproof lock.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the right hand side doors page 101, fig. 59
page 101, fig. 60.
Deactivating the childproof lock
Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you
want to deactivate.
With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni-
tion key, clockwise for the right hand side doors, and anti-clock-
wise for the left hand side doors page 101, fig. 59
page 101, fig. 60.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the
outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the
key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes
remote control and a pla
The set of keys belonging to y
one remote control key
one key without remote co
a plastic key tab* .
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key
vehicle identification number.
AC
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could make the aid difficult in an emergency situation.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to turn the steering wheel.
Caution There are electronic components in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and
hitting the keys
Unlocking and locking104
row) on the control, the key blade is released.
g. 62 .
62 .
utton fig. 62 until all the turn signals
hen the unlocking button is pressed,
e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
the key fig. 62, will flash.
and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
The maximum range depends on different
as the batteries start to lose power.
, is pressed once, the driver door is
cked.
twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 63 Range of the remote control
A1
A2
A3
A3
A1
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from a distance.
Using the button fig. 62 (ar
Unlocking the vehicle fi
Locking the vehicle fig.
Unlocking the tailgate. Press b
on the vehicle flash briefly. W
you have 2 minutes to open th
again.
Also, the battery indicator on
The remote control transmitter
receiver is inside the vehicle.
factors. The range is reduced
Selective unlocking*
When the button fig. 62
unlocked, all others remain lo
Press the button fig. 62
Fig. 62 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the
eries may damage the radio frequency remote
ys replace the dead battery with another of the
nvironment sed of at an appropriate waste facility or
e, given that their components can affect the
ote control key
lock or lock the door with the remote
synchronised.
04, fig. 62 button on the remote control.
using the key bit within one minute.
could no longer be opened and closed with the
is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
emote control. The remote control key will have
e available in your Authorised Service Centres,
to the locking system.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note The remote control can be programmed by means of pressing the
unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will unlock. When the
button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 104,
fig. 63 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds
after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked
if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 105.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does n
battery must be replaced.
Caution The use of inappropriate batt
control. For this reason, alwa
same size and power.
For the sake of the e Used batteries must be dispo
through an authorised servic
environment.
Synchronising the rem
If it is not possible to un
control, it should be re-
Press the page 1
Then close the vehicle
It is possible that the vehicle
remote control if the button
range of the radio frequency r
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys ar
where they must be matched
A1
Unlocking and locking106
lly (emergency opening)
fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
s:
the button shown by the (arrow).
oor to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
alarm is not triggered immediately.
in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
you do not switch on the ignition within 15
d.
via the unlocking button of the remote control
the ignition lock.
, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
r has been opened), the alarm is triggered
s active even if the battery is disconnected or
ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
is active.
nction incorporated in the anti-theft
authorized vehicle entry by means of
ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the vehicle is opened using the
key, or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the vehicle is locked:
Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the tailgate
Switching on the ignition
Movements in the vehicle interior
Undue manipulation of the alarm
Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the turn signals flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanica
If the remote control function
vehicle. This is done as follow
Unfold the key by pressing
Use the lock on the driver d
system remains active, but an
Switch on the ignition with
on, the electronic immobiliser
the anti-theft alarm system. If
seconds, the alarm is triggere
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked
or when the key is inserted in
Note If, after the alarm goes off
tailgate is opened after a doo
again.
Vehicle monitoring remain
not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered imm
nected while the alarm system
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control fu
alarm* which detects un
ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 s
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Activation
It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
The Safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.
For those vehicles in which a separation screen is fitted, the alarm will not function correctly due to interference with the sensor.
Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
Unlocking and locking108
r and lift the tailgate fig. 64. The tail-
lly open.
of the two handles on the interior lining
ightly.
erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
erative and the tailgate may be opened.
on or the button on the remote control
rument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
ing signal is also given if the tailgate is opened
ster than 6 km/h.*
Fig. 65 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Tailgate
Unlocking and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release leve
gate will be automatica
Closing the tailgate
Hold the tailgate by one
and close it, pushing sl
The system may or may not op
If the tailgate is locked then it
then the opening system is op
To lock/unlock, press the butt
key.
A warning appears on the inst
erly closed.* An acoustic warn
while the vehicle is moving fa
Fig. 64 Tailgate: opening from the outside
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
to be opened if the central locking
xample, if the battery is flat)
gage compartment allowing access to the
anism.
inside the luggage compartment
oove and unlock the locking system,
ght to left, as shown by the arrow
Fig. 66 Tailgate: emer- gency open
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.
If the tailgate is not fully closed, open it with the handle and close it again correctly. Do not try to close it by pressing on the surface of the tail- gate, as this may damage the surface.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle
does not operate (for e
There is a groove in the lug
emergency opening mech
Opening the tailgate from
Insert the key in the gr
turning the key from ri
fig. 66.
Unlocking and locking110
t left door
t right door
ting the electric window buttons in the rear
left door
right door
door can be used to disable the electric
ors.
ttons on rear doors are activated.
s on rear doors are deactivated.
ic windows can result in injury.
ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.
ey with you when you leave the vehicle.
sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the c equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This n an emergency situation.
work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.
ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using
the controls on the driver door.
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open the window.
Pull button to close the window .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver door
Button for window in fron
Button for window in fron
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactiva
doors
Button for window in rear
Button for window in rear
Safety switch *
Safety switch on the driver
window buttons in the rear do
Safety switch not pressed: bu
Safety switch pressed: button
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electr
Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a
Always take the vehicle k
Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electri risk of accident. The doors ca could make the aid difficult i
The electric windows will ignition and one of the front
If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be
Fig. 67 Detail of the driver door: controls for the front and rear windows
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 111
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ork when the ignition has been switched off,
on.
e function will not work if the battery has been
if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact a specialised workshop.
ll-back function. This reduces the risk
dows are closing.
when closing automatically, the window stops
ediately .
mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
sumes.
ucted, the window will stop at this point.
on why the window cannot be closed, try to
ds.
seconds, the window will open fully when you
ne-touch closing is reactivated.
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact a specialised workshop.
tric windows can result in injury.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again page 111. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close all windows.
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 110, fig. 67 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not w
even if the key is in the igniti
The automatic open and clos
temporarily disconnected, or
reactivated.
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
Roll-back function
The windows have a ro
of injuries when the win
If a window is obstructed
at this point and lowers imm
If this happens, check im
could not be closed before at
normal automatic function re
If the window is still obstr
If there is no obvious reas
close it again within 5 secon
If you wait longer than 5 - 10
operate one of the buttons. O
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elec
A1 A2
Unlocking and locking112
the remote control for about 3 seconds.
tion electrically will be either opened or
to interrupt the function.
ompletely closed, the turn signals will
roof*
e sliding/tilting sunroof
of is opened and closed using the
nition is switched on.
Fig. 68 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
page 112.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on
All windows which func
closed.
Press the unlock button
Once the windows are c
flash.
Sliding/tilting sun
Opening and closing th
The sliding/tilting sunro
rotary knob when the ig
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking 113
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-
of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.
or lock of the driver door in the locking
ng/tilting sunroof is closed.
rrupt this function.
n the remote control for about 3 seconds.
roof is closed.
tton to interrupt the function.
g sunroof has closed completely, the turn
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position fig. 68 .
Opening the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting sunroof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about 10 minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sun visor
The sun visor is opened together with the sliding/tilting sunroof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without checking there are no obstructions, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou ation.
The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the do
position until the slidi
Release the key to inte
Using the remote control
Push the lock button o
The sliding/tilting sun
Release the unlock bu
When the sliding/tiltin
signals flash once.
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking114
a roll-back function which prevents larger
the roof is closed. The roll-back function does
ched against the roof opening. The
nd opens again immediately if it is obstructed
s been opened again by the roll-back function,
ng the rotary button at the front in position
ing sunroof has closed fully. Please note that hout the roll-back function.
eakdown
nroof may be closed manually.
y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
the spring) and close the sliding roof.
tion.
Fig. 70 Emergency closing handle
AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob remains in the last position selected if
the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will
have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting sunroof*
The sliding/tilting sunroof has
objects getting trapped when
not prevent fingers getting pin
sliding/tilting sunroof stops a
when closing.
If the sliding/tilting sunroof ha
it can be closed only by pressi
fig. 69 until the sliding/tilt
the sunroof will now close wit
Operation in the event of a br
In case of a breakdown, the su
Remove the plastic cover b
Remove the lever from the
as possible (pushing against
Fit the lever back into posi
Fig. 69 Roof lining description: sliding/tilting sunroof rotary knob
Lights and visibility 115
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ts*
osition or to the first stop. The
switch lights up.
lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
osition or to the second stop
lights up in the instrument panel.
lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
m position to the last stop. A warning
strument panel.
lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped beam headlights if
or.
hts will only work with the ignition on. The side
when the ignition is turned off.
r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
d while the driver door remains open. This is a
off.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 71 to position .
Switching on dipped beam headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog ligh
Pull the switch out of p
symbol in the light
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the switch out of p
. A warning lamp
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the light switch fro
lamp lights up in the in
WARNING
Never drive with just the side not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo it is dark or if visibility is po
Note The dipped beam headlig
lights come on automatically
If the lights are left on afte
an acoustic warning will soun
reminder to switch the lights
Fig. 71 Detailed view of the dash panel: lights, fog lights and rear fog light switch
Lights and visibility116
0.
is switched on, dipped beam headlights are
a photosensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
e dipped beam headlights when the wind-
ating continuously for a few seconds and it
e continuous or intermittent wipe is switched
128.
ght control is connected but the dipped lights
lights up on the light control fig. 72. If the
the dipped lights, the instrument and control
dlight control is switched on, the dipped ed on with fog. Therefore, the dipped beam ly.
automatic headlight system, when the key is
acoustic signal will only sound if the light
r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
matic light function is switched on, the fog
be switched on in addition.
cribed here is subject to the relevant statutory
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the vehicle will automati-
cally be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and tail
lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence
on the useful life of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when they
are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
Turn the light switch to
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control
automatically switched on by
example.
The rain sensor switches on th
screen wipers have been oper
switches the lights off when th
off for some minutes page
When the automatic dipped li
are off, the warning lamp
automatic control switches on
lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
Even if the automatic hea headlights will not be switch must be switched on manual
Note For those vehicles with the
removed from the ignition, the
control is in the position o
home function.
If the daylight driving auto
lights or rear fog light cannot
The use of the lighting des
requirements.
Fig. 72 Automatic lighting
Lights and visibility 117
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ed light in combination with the daytime s)
the daytime lighting are activated at the same
he instrument panel lighting will automatically
entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go
ed light control switches off the dipped lights
nel), the daytime lights come back on.
f, move the turn signal and main beam lever
signal and headlamp flash).
conds while holding this position. The daytime
e switched on.
hts
f, move the turn signal and main beam lever
ignal and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-
conds while holding this position. The daytime
nnot be switched on.
-xenon lamps)
ition, move the turn signal lever upwards (right
wards to flash position and hold it in this posi-
ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
ignition. The daytime lights are activated and
bi-xenon lamps)
ition, move the turn signal lever upwards (left
wards to flash position and hold it in this posi-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go
off when the tailgate is opened (depending on the country).
Daytime lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.
Daytime running lights (halogen lamps)20)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.
These include the dipped, side and number plate lights.
The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the
light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control
lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel
will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.
It is not possible to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please contact a
specialised workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.
Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.
The lights are built-in separately to the headlights and are switched on each
time the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in position 0 or .
Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp
If the dipped light control and
time, the dipped lights and t
come on as required (e.g. on
off. When the automatic dipp
(e.g. on coming out of the tun
Activating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (right turn
Switch on the ignition for 3 se
lights are activated and can b
Deactivating the daytime lig
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (left turn s
tion.
Switch on the ignition for 3 se
lights are deactivated and ca
Activating daytime lights (bi
Remove the key from the ign
turn signal) and press it back
tion.
Insert the key and switch the
seconds. Then, switch off the
can be switched on.
Deactivating daytime lights (
Remove the key from the ign
turn signal) and press it back
tion. 20) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra
Lights and visibility118
n.
activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
ion and
darkness.
itches off in the following cases:
elay in switching off the headlamps has ended
in.
to position .
n.
itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home
n be changed or the function can be connected
ights and visibility page 75.
ed while the lights are on, and the lights are
door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as
on is on, the lights are automatically switched
pt when the light switch is in position or
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Insert the key and switch the ignition on, holding it in this position for 3
seconds. Then, switch off the ignition. The daytime lights are deactivated and
cannot be switched on.
Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Coming home / leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The
Leaving Home function is controlled with a photosensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the number plate light will light up to
provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home
lighting comes on. If the driver door is already open when the lights are
flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off
the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.
If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain
open.
If the light switch is turned to position .
If the ignition is switched o
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is
the light control is in posit
the photosensor detects
The Leaving Home lighting sw
If the time period for the d
If the vehicle is locked aga
If the light switch is turned
If the ignition is switched o
Note The setting for the delay in sw
and Leaving Home function ca
or disconnected in the menu L
If the ignition key is remov
flashed briefly and the driver
when the Coming Home functi
off after a period of time (exce
.
Lights and visibility 119
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
coming traffic more than necessary. At the same
dlight settings, the driver has the best possible
djusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
humb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
trol
ulbs (xenon bulbs) are equipped with
trol. This means that the headlights will be
of the vehicle and nodding movements when
tomatically compensated for.
ulbs do not have headlight range control.
for driving round bends)
ends, the headlights will light the
f the road.
A2
Fig. 74 Cornering lighting using adaptive headlights
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel fig. 73 .
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
rated in the instrument panel.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition
is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the
ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped beam headlights in good time when light conditions
become poor.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling on
time, by using the correct hea
lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be a
To lower the beam, turn the t
Dynamic headlight range con
Vehicles with gas discharge b dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load level
pulling off and braking are au
Vehicles with gas discharge b
Adaptive headlights* (
When driving around b
most important areas o
Fig. 73 Dash panel: regu- lation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control
A1
A1
A2
A2
Lights and visibility120
ts are used to draw the attention of
vehicle in emergencies.
n:
afe distance from moving traffic.
tch on the hazard warning lights .
ngage 1st gear, and for an automatic
to P.
e to draw the attention of other road users
Fig. 75 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Dynamic cornering lights* (AFS)
The dynamic cornering lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more
than 10 km/h and the dipped headlights are on. When taking a bend, the
road is illuminated better with directional gas discharge bulbs than with
conventional fixed headlights.
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the
instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or
instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel display. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault
repaired.
If the control bulb lights up on the instrument panel but all the bulbs are
operating correctly, there may still be a fault in the dynamic curve lighting
system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault
repaired.
WARNING
If the automatic dipped beam control is switched on, the dipped beam headlights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manually using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning ligh
other road users to your
If your vehicle breaks dow
1. Park your vehicle at a s
2. Press the button to swi
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox e
move the selector lever
6. Use the warning triangl
to your vehicle.
Lights and visibility 121
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ning lights described here is subject to the rele-
eam headlight lever
in beam lever also operates the
headlight flasher.
beam headlight lever has the following
nals
ay up fig. 76 to indicate right, and
indicate left.
Fig. 76 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for example
when:
reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal turn signal lamps and the
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80
km/h, the brake light flashes several times per second to warn vehicles
driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come
on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-
matically when the vehicle starts to move again.
WARNING
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with inflammable materials under the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire!
Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard war
vant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main b
The turn signal and ma
parking lights and the
The turn signal and main
functions:
Switching on the turn sig
Move the lever all the w
all the way down toA2
Lights and visibility122
ted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-
at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs
does not light up. Change the bulb.
can only be switched on if the dipped beam
warning lamp then comes on in the instru-
es on for as long as you pull the lever even if
n. The warning lamp then comes on in the
e switched on, the front and rear side lights on
vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
the ignition. If the lights are switched on, an
while the driver door is open.
ft on after the key has been taken out of the
al sounds when the driver door is opened. This
turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding indicator lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on and off
If the dipped lights are on, push the lever forward page 121,
fig. 76 to switch on the main beam.
Push the lever towards the steering wheel page 121, fig. 76
to switch off the main beam.
Headlight flashers
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the
flasher.
Switching on parking lights
Switch the ignition off and remove the key from the lock.
Move the lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking
lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.
Note The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the instrument panel. The warning
lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a trailer is
correctly attached and connec
tive, the warning lamp flashes
are damaged, warning lamp
The main beam headlights
headlights are already on. The
ment panel.
The headlight flasher com
no other lights are switched o
instrument panel.
When the parking lights ar
the corresponding side of the
work if the key is removed from
acoustic signal will be emitted
If the turn signal lever is le
ignition lock, an acoustic sign
is a reminder to switch off the
the parking light on.
A1 A2
A3
A4
A4
Lights and visibility 123
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
closed, the interior lights will be switched off
viding the key has been removed and the cour-
his prevents the battery from discharging.
2
ed to select the following positions:
(not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior
the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Interior lights
Front interior light type 1
The switch fig. 77 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition. And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O fig. 77.
Note If not all the vehicle doors are
after approx. 10 minutes, pro
tesy light position selected. T
Front interior light type
The switch fig. 78 is us
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position
ically switched on when the v
ignition. And turn off approx.
lights are switched off when
switched on.
Fig. 77 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
AA
AA
Lights and visibility124
t
n fig. 79 and fig. 80 to switch on
ff
n to switch the reading light off.
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2
AB AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to position .
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O page 123, fig. 78.
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Front reading lights Switching on the reading ligh
Press the corresponding butto
the reading light.
Switching the reading lights o
Press the corresponding butto
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1
Lights and visibility 125
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
closed, the interior lights will be switched off
viding the key has been removed and the cour-
his prevents the battery from discharging.
nd the front passenger can be pulled out of their
vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 82
isors have covers. When you open the cover ,
Fig. 82 Sun visor on the driver side
A2
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Rear interior and reading lights*
The switch fig. 81 is used to select the following positions:
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position fig. 81 , the interior and reading lights are switched
off.
Switching on the reading light
Turn the switch to position (left reading light) or to position (right
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position . The interior lights are automatically switched
on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the ignition. The
light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note If not all the vehicle doors are
after approx. 10 minutes, pro
tesy light position selected. T
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver a
mountings in the centre of the
The vanity mirrors in the sun v
a lamp in the roof lights up.
Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.
AC
A1
A2 A4
A3
A5
A1
Lights and visibility126
s
ver controls the windscreen wipers
and wipe.
r fig. 84 has the following positions:
ion .
sition .
Fig. 84 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The light* in the roof lining will go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
back or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Note The roof lamp will turn off about 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-
tion key. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Sun blind*
The windows on the rear doors are fitted with a sun blind
Rear door sun blind*
Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the door
frame fig. 83.
Windscreen wiper
Windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper le
and the automatic wash
The windscreen wiper leve
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to posit
Interval wipe
Move the lever up to po
Fig. 83 Rear door sun visor
Lights and visibility 127
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
des reduce visibility and safety levels while
hould not use the wash / wipe system unless creen with the heating and ventilation system. rwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure
onding warnings on page 229, Changing
ck that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
zen to the windscreen, you could damage both
er motor.
ill only work when the ignition is switched on.
cles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
and the bonnet closed.
o not go as far as the rest position. When the
they are totally hidden.
automatically be selected if speed page 126,
hen the vehicle stops. The set speed will be
arts again
ed again after approximately five seconds once
stem has been operated, provided the vehicle
you activate the wipers less than three seconds
wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.
k again, you have to turn the ignition off and
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the
intervals. Control to the left: long intervals; control to the right:
short intervals. Four wiper interval stages can be set using switch
.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Short wipe
Move the lever down to position to give the windscreen a
short wipe. The wiper will start to move faster if you keep the
lever pressed down for longer than two seconds.
Wash and wipe automatic system
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel - Position . The wash
function will start immediately and the wipers will start with a
slight delay. The wash and wiper systems will function at the
same time at speeds of over 120 km/h.
Release the lever. The wipers will keep running for approximately
four seconds.
Heated windscreen in the wiper blade area*
In some countries and with some versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen in the area of the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the heated rear
window key .
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper bla driving.
In cold conditions, you s you have warmed the winds The washer fluid could othe your view of the road.
Always note the corresp windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always che
glass before using the wipers
when the wiper blades are fro
the wiper blades and the wip
Note The windscreen wipers w
In certain versions of vehi
work when the ignition is on
When in use, the wipers d
lever is moved to position 0,
The next speed down will
fig. 84 or is selected w
resumed when the vehicle st
The windscreen will be wip
the automatic wipe/wash sy
is in transit (drip function). If
after the drip function, a new
For the drip function to wor
then on again.
AA
AA
A2
A3
A4
A5
A2 A3
Lights and visibility128
or
iper lever into position fig. 86
the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
he right: highly sensitive. Control to the
nterval wipe function. You will have to switch
witch off the ignition. This is done by switching
and back on.
windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
lts.
Fig. 86 Windscreen wiper lever
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
When the interval wipe function is on, the intervals are directly propor-
tional to the speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the
intervals.
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
obstacle and switch the wiper back on again.
Before removing any objects that may be trapped in the side areas of the
windscreen, always move the wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
The heat output of the heated jets is controlled automatically when the
ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sens
Move the windscreen w
Move the control to
rain sensor. Control to t
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the i
the rain sensor back on if you s
the wiper interval function off
Note Do not put stickers on the
cause sensor disruption or fau
Fig. 85 Rain sensor*
AA
Lights and visibility 129
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tic windscreen wiper/washer
wards to position fig. 87. The wash
ediately and the wiper will start with a
creen wash system will function as long as
is position.
wiper then wipes for approximately 4
ntervals again.
washer system stops and the wipers func-
des reduce visibility and safety levels while
onding warnings on page 229, Changing
k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
lass, this could damage both the wiper blade
l only function when the ignition is switched on
indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
ipe.
A7
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position fig. 87. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the automa
Press the lever fully for
function will start imm
slight delay. The winds
you hold the lever in th
Release the lever. The
seconds, and then in i
Release the lever. The
tion.
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper bla driving.
Always note the corresp windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always chec
before using the wiper for the
wiper blade is frozen to the g
and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wiper wil
and the tailgate is closed.
In reverse gear, with the w
screen wiper will make one w
Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper
A6
A6
Lights and visibility130
nterior mirror*
le function can be switched on and off
zle function
88. Indicator lamp goes off.
le function
88. The indicator lamp turns on.
ivated every time the ignition is switched on.
s up in the mirror housing.
is enabled, the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle func-
r is engaged.
Fig. 88 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Headlight washer*
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped beam headlights or
main beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Rear-view mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle i
The automatic anti-dazz
as desired.
Switching off the anti-daz
Press button fig.
Switching on the anti-dazz
Press button fig.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is act
The green indicator lamp light
When the anti-dazzle function
matically according to the am
tion is cancelled if reverse gea
AA
AA
Lights and visibility 131
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle.
(right exterior mirror).
to position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle .
rs*
to the central position fig. 89 so
ew mirrors warm up and the heated wind-
ade rest area is activated. page 127
ting is not activated in temperatures
0 C.
s*
89 to position to fold in the exterior
ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
omatic car wash. This will help prevent
ith convenience control*
fold back automatically with convenience
te or the key)
n the door and use the contact
ack out to the extended position*
er position to fold the exterior mirrors back
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the rear view mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob fig. 89 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to
good view to the rear o
3. Turn knob to position R
4. Swivel the rotary knob
good view to the rear o
Heating the exterior mirro
Turn the knob forwards
that the heated rear vi
screen* in the wiper bl
The exterior mirror hea
above approximately 2
Folding in exterior mirror
Turn the control fig.
mirrors. You should alw
driving through an aut
damage.
Folding exterior mirrors w
The exterior mirror will
closing (with the remo
To unfold it again, ope
Folding exterior mirrors b
Turn the knob to anoth
out. .
Fig. 89 Controls of exte- rior mirrors
Lights and visibility132
d separately or simultaneously, as described
exterior mirrors is not activated at speeds of
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the rear view mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The mirrors can be adjuste
before.
The fold-in function on the
above 40 km/h.
Seats and storage compartments 133
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never , out of the window or on the seat. This is also correct sitting position exposes you to an se of a sudden braking or an accident. If the d sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect
iver and front passenger to keep a distance of ing wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the at the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal the driver and the steering wheel or between
dash panel should always be as great as
passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the eat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
se the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts.
to installing a child seat on the front lling a child seat, please observe the warnings hild safety.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Seats and storage compartments
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is
equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to
suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
a safe driving page 7,
ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-
tion page 19.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.
Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet on rest them on the dash panel applied to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in ca airbag is triggered, you coul sitting position.
It is important for the dr at least 25 cm from the steer minimum distance means th injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.
Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your s is moving. This could increa In addition, while adjusting position. Risk of fatal accide
Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When insta described in page 46, C
WARNING (continued)
Seats and storage compartments134
nt so that the top is at the same level as
as close as possible to the same level as
least at eye level fig. 90 and fig. 91.
page 135
estraints removed or improperly adjusted njuries.
restraints could lead to death in the event of
restraints also increase the risk of injury driving or braking manoeuvres.
always be adjusted according to the
Fig. 91 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restrai
the top of your head or
the top of your head, at
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head r increases the risk of severe i
Improperly adjusted head a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head during sudden or unexpected
The head restraints must passengers height.
Fig. 90 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
Seats and storage compartments 135
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
raint, press the button and push head
d restraint engages securely in one of its
eats)
t forward or back to the required position.
int
t up as far as it will go.
. 92 (arrow).
of fitting without releasing the button.
nt into the guides on the backrest.
wn.
int to suit body size page 14 and
straints have been removed. Risk of injury.
straints are in an unsuitable position, there is
straint, you must always adjust it properly for otection.
y warnings in page 134, Correct adjust-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head rest
restraint downwards.
Make sure that the hea
positions page 14.
Angle adjustment (front s
Press the head restrain
Removing the head restra
Push the head restrain
Press the button fig
Pull head restraint out
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrai
Push head restraint do
Adjust the head restra
page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head re
Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pr
Please observe the safet ment of head restraints.
Fig. 92 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and storage compartments136
angle
backrest and turn the hand wheel.
upport*
backrest and turn the hand wheel to
ort.
, the curvature of the cushioned area of the
or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the
.
front passenger seat while the vehicle is in seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting ts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat
ionary.
y to the driver and front passenger in case of ent, never drive with the backrest tilted m protection of the seat belt can be achieved n an upright position and the driver and front
usted their seat belts. The further the back- e greater the risk of injury due to improper
curing the seat height into forwards/back- e caused if the seat height is adjusted n.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in fig. 93 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backrest
Take your weight off the
Adjusting the lumbar s
Take your weight off the
adjust the lumbar supp
As you make the adjustments
lumbar region becomes more
natural curvature of the spine
WARNING
Never adjust the driver or motion. While adjusting your position. Risk of fatal acciden only when the vehicle is stat
To reduce the risk of injur a sudden braking or an accid towards the rear. The maximu only when the backrests are i passenger have properly adj rests are tilted to the rear, th positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when se wards position. Injuries can b without due care and attentio
Fig. 93 Front left seat controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and storage compartments 137
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
icles without Climatronic
umb wheel fig. 94 to switch on the seat
ing is switched off in the 0 position.
icles with Climatronic
itch on the seat heating.
heating at maximum level (level 3).
heating at medium level (level 2).
t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
ssed four times, the heating goes off and
l 0).
hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
nd the right thumb wheel the right seat.
g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
gle point to the seat cushion and backrest.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Front seat heating for veh
Turn the appropriate th
heating. The seat heat
Front seat heating for veh
Press button to sw
Press once to set seat
Press twice to set seat
Press three times to se
When the button is pre
the LED goes out (leve
The seat heating only works w
wheel controls the left seat a
Caution To avoid damaging the heatin
apply sharp pressure at a sin
Fig. 94 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
Fig. 95 Front seat heating with Climatronic
AA
Seats and storage compartments138
rwards or backwards independently. The
/3 of the seat. There are various possible
unlock the lever in the direction of the
forwards or backwards to the desired
t
top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat
ection of the arrow and hold the loop in
backrest to the required position and
the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could nt and therefore, injury.
down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid .
e moved, is fixed in position.
aximum luggage compartment space, put the
without moving.
aximum space without putting the backrests
to the desired position.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Rear seats
Seat adjustment
The seats may be moved fo
movement can be 1/3 or 2
positions.
Adjusting reach
In the seated position,
arrow fig. 96.
Move the seat cushion
position.
Backrest angle adjustmen
Hold the backrest at the
fig. 97 in the dir
this position. Push the
release the loop.
WARNING
Adjust the seat only when seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accide
Do not push the backrests damage to the centre console
Ensure that the seat, onc
Note In order to maintain the m
backrests in position normal,
In order to maintain the m
down, move the seats forward
Fig. 96 For unlocking the rear seat
Fig. 97 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment
A1
Seats and storage compartments 139
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ackrests down
e of the seat fig. 99 in the direction
e seat backrest into position.
e backrest has engaged properly in position
cking system loops on the seats may not be
ckrest into position ensure that the seat belts
Fig. 99 Folding or opening the front seat backrests
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Folding the seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 98
In this position the backrest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located
on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the
backrest.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
For safety reasons the locking system loops on the seats may not be used to secure any items.
Folding the rear seat b
Pull the loop on the sid
of the arrow and lift th
WARNING
You should check that th after the loop is released.
For safety reasons the lo used to secure any items.
After locking the seat ba protrude from the seat.
Fig. 98 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests
A1
Seats and storage compartments140
with storage area
n the armrest.
a, lift the armrest up in the direction of
d then lift the cover.
r* or the lower storage area, pull on the
ressing on the button.
a, push the armrest down.
closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking an accident.
Fig. 101 Front armrest with storage area
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Storage compartment
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 100.
WARNING
Always keep the storage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.
Centre armrest at front
There is a storage area i
To open the storage are
the arrow fig. 101 an
To access the CD loade
armrest cover without p
To close the storage are
WARNING
Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event of
Fig. 100 Passenger side: storage compartment
Seats and storage compartments 141
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
aximum weight of 1.5 kg.
wer cover open. There is an injury risk for leased in case of sudden braking or an
to the rear of the front seat backrests.
it up in the direction of the arrow
Fig. 103 Folding tray on the front left seat
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.
Storage areas under the front seats*
There is a storage locker with a cover under each front seat.
The drawer* fig. 102 is opened by pushing the button and putting the
cover back.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
The drawers will hold a m
Do not drive with the dra passengers if the cargo is re accident.
Folding tray*
Folding trays are fitted
To open the tray, open
fig. 103.
Fig. 102 Storage area under the front seats
AA
Seats and storage compartments142
cover to open these compartments
ill then open.
s it up until it engages.
cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to g a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event any items from being thrown through the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
WARNING
The folding trays may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The tray must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Never place hot drinks in the cup holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Roof storage compartment*
There are four storage compartments in the roof
Press the button on the
fig. 104. The cover w
To close the cover, pres
WARNING
Always keep the storage area reduce the risk of injury durin of an accident and to prevent vehicle interior.
Fig. 104 Roof storage compartments
Seats and storage compartments 143
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
rtment floor and fold it back all the way
fig. 106 into the side grooves depending
ts to be transported. The on-board tool kit
re located underneath the luggage
uggage compartment with suitable straps
um authorised weight for the vehicle
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Storage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable storage area* in the luggage compartment
floor.
Lift the luggage compa
fig. 105.
Fit the separator on the size of the objec
and the spare wheel a
compartment.
Secure objects in the l
on the fastening rings.
Note Do not exceed the maxim
page 279. Fig. 105 Variable luggage compartment floor storage compart- ment
Fig. 106 Variable luggage compartment floor storage compart- ment
AA
Seats and storage compartments144
rear),
gage compartment,
in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles
kit*.
on the rear roof handles.
s on the dash panel. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. r cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
n fall from the centre console or other storage while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a ou will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
t hooks must not restrict the drivers view. oks are intended only for use with light arti- any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging dden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Luggage compartment net*
There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for
securing objects.
Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage
compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 107.
Note Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle
page 279.
Other storage areas
Other storage areas can be found:
in the centre console,
in the door trims (front and
in the side trims of the lug
in the spare wheel recess
with an optional anti-puncture
The clothes hooks are located
WARNING
Do not store loose object flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking o accident.
Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver footwell sudden braking manoeuvre, y accelerator. Risk of accident.
Clothing hung on the coa Risk of accident. The coat ho cles of clothing. Do not leave articles of clothing. During su cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.
Fig. 107 Retaining net
Seats and storage compartments 145
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
rest*
Fig. 109 Opening the rear drink holders
Fig. 110 Rear armrest/drink holder
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Front drinks holders
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
fig. 108.
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear drink holder*/ Arm
Fig. 108 Front drink holders
Seats and storage compartments146
partment
ction of the rear seat backrest, in order to
of the backrest.
ompartment mounting plate
ide of the vehicle, through the rear
ould be fitted between the backrest and
seat area.
lips the cushion frame. The rings of the
tment mounting plate appear at the front
the plate clip, tilt the rear backrest of the
slightly and then lean the backrest back-
g of the mobile storage compartment
e easier.
Fig. 112 Mobile storage compartment mounting plate
AH
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Opening and closing the armrest*/ drink holder*
To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 145,
fig. 109 .
To close, lift the Drink holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the
arrow page 145, fig. 110 .
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 144.
Multi-purpose mobile storage compartment* - Fitting and removal
This storage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fitting mobile storage com
Fold down the small se
access the large section
Fit the mobile storage c
fig. 112 from the ins
section of the seat. It sh
the seat, in the central
Push the plate until it c
mobile storage compar
of the seat.
If it is difficult to make
large section forwards
wards to make the fittin
onto the mounting plat
A1
A2
Fig. 111 Mobile storage compartment. Installation
Seats and storage compartments 147
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
torage compartment* - General
ent may only be placed in the central
Fig. 113 Mobile storage compartment. Opening
Fig. 114 Mobile storage compartment. Functions
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Place the mobile storage compartment onto the foam of the
central seat.
Set both mounting pieces together page 146, fig. 111,
with both mounting rings page 146, fig. 112 and press
hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile storage compartment
Pull each of the buttons page 146, fig. 111 on the clips
(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.
Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile storage
compartment mounting plate.
Multi-purpose mobile s information
This storage compartm
area of the rear seat
AE
AG
AF
Seats and storage compartments148
ng, keep the tables stored inside the mobile e cover closed, and likewise when they are
he cup holders. The drink may spill and cause ving.
up holders when the vehicle is in motion, may be flung around the vehicle and cause
ing plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion
se, store inside the storage compartment.
compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.
age compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it
mpartment and checking that both safety clips
rings.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Opening
Lift the cover at point page 147, fig. 113.
Closing
Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile storage compartment
The front open glove compartment may be used to store small objects
that will not damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung
around the interior of the vehicle.
The cup holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-
zines.
The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table page 147, fig. 114, it must be removed from its
compartment in the side of the mobile storage compartment and fitted into
slot page 147, fig. 114 on the front section of the mobile storage
compartment.
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand slot of the
front of the mobile storage compartment and the table in the left-hand
compartment is fitted in the right-hand slot.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
The mobile storage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.
Do not drive when the cover of the mobile storage compartment is open.
Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
When the vehicle is movi storage compartment with th not in use
Never place hot drinks in t burns when the vehicle is mo
Do not leave cans in the c there is a danger that the can injury.
Make sure that the mount frame.
When the plate is not in u
When the mobile storage be fastened by the retaining
Note Check that the mobile stor
forwards by the front glove co
are correctly clipped onto the
AB AA
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Seats and storage compartments 149
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
lighter fig. 116 to activate it .
op out slightly.
ighter and light the cigarette on the
ette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
ly. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.
hen the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the
Fig. 116 The cigarette lighter is located in the power socket on the front of the centre console
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 115.
To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
Press on the cigarette
Wait for the lighter to p
Pull out the cigarette l
glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigar a fire.
Using the lighter careful cigarette lighter can cause b
The lighter only works w running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.
Fig. 115 Ashtray located in the front drink holder
Seats and storage compartments150
connected to the 12 volt socket in the front
in the luggage compartment* fig. 118. The
power point must not exceed a power rating of
nnected accessories will only operate when engine is running. Improper use of the ies can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. ver leave children alone inside the vehicle.
nces with the engine switched off will cause a
l accessories, see the instructions in
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be
centre console fig. 117 and
appliances connected to each
120 Watt.
WARNING
The power sockets and the co the ignition is on or when the sockets or electrical accessor To avoid the risk of injury, ne
Note The use of electrical applia
battery discharge.
Before using any electrica
page 214. Fig. 117 Power socket in front centre console
Fig. 118 Power socket in luggage compartment
Seats and storage compartments 151
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s an audio input (red and white connectors) or
ed, white and yellow connectors). For more
audio and video source, see the RSE manual.
Fig. 120 AUX RSE connection
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*
Lift the AUX cover fig. 119.
Insert the plug as far as possible (see Radio manual).
AUX RSE connection*
This connector may be used a
audio and video connector (r
details about the use of this
Fig. 119 Auxiliary audio connection
Seats and storage compartments152
he first aid kit do not belong to the standard
ly with legal requirements.
the contents of the first aid kit. After it has
a new one.
ies and emergency equipment see the instruc-
ed to the luggage compartment carpet with
not belong to the standard vehicle equipment.
comply with legal requirements.
isher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
e for checking.
ies and emergency equipment see the instruc-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
MEDIA-IN connector*
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Warning triangle* and first-aid kit*
The warning triangle and the first aid kit may be located in the storage
compartment in the luggage compartment floor, under the carpet.
The first aid kit may be located in the storage compartment under the carpet
in the luggage compartment floor, or in the storage compartment in the
luggage compartment side lining, depending on the version.
Note The warning triangle and t
vehicle equipment.
The first aid kit must comp
Observe the expiry date of
expired you should purchase
Before acquiring accessor
tions in page 214.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher* is attach
Velcro.
Note The fire extinguisher does
The fire extinguisher must
Ensure that the fire extingu
should, therefore, be checked
will inform you of the next dat
Before acquiring accessor
tions in page 214.
Fig. 121 Connection in central armrest compart- ment
Seats and storage compartments 153
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ld chafe against the wires of the heating
nd cause damage.
f the rear side windows must not be covered as
eing extracted from the vehicle.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Luggage compartment
Storing objects
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings*.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.
Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
Caution Hard objects on the shelf cou
element in the rear window a
Note The ventilation slots in front o
this would prevent stale air b
Seats and storage compartments154
ull the shelf back until you hear a click
PRESS, and the cover is retrieved auto-
direction of the arrow, lift the cover and
he reverse order.
bjects on the rear shelf, because they will nts in case of sudden braking.
, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
partment could mean that the rear shelf is not
bent or damaged.
nt is overloaded, remove the tray.
items of clothing on the luggage compartment
ced.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Retractable rear shelf Using the rear shelf
Use the handle to p
fig. 122.
Press the area marked
matically.
To remove the rear shelf
Press the side pin in the
remove it. fig. 123
Installation is done in t
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard o endanger the vehicle occupa
Caution Before closing the tailgate
An overloaded luggage com
correctly seated and it may be
If the luggage compartme
Note Ensure that, when placing
cover, rear visibility is not redu
Fig. 122 Using the rear shelf
Fig. 123 Removing the rear shelf
AA
Seats and storage compartments 155
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
rneath between the backrest and the
the slots in the roof, first the right then the
front anchor rings to tense the net
points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
ggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
ow the assembly instructions included with the
careful to position the front and rear luggage
he special housings on the longitudinal bars.
osition according to the direction of travel indi-
l. Not following these instructions may cause
rs.
. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
t bar, the load must be distributed evenly along
e maximum load permitted for the entire roof
) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
exceeded. See the Technical Data section.
or large objects on the roof, any change in the
e to a change in the centre of gravity or an
st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
must be used.
ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
system when opened.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Partition net*
The net partition prevents loose objects in the luggage
compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger
compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).
Pull the net from unde
folding tray and fit it to
left fig. 124.
Hook the belts into the
fig. 125.
Roof rack*
Please observe the following
For safety reasons, only lu
should be used.
It is essential that you foll
bars exactly, being especially
compartment cover bars on t
You must also respect their p
cated in the assembly manua
marks on the longitudinal ba
Distribute the load evenly
each roof rack system suppor
the entire length. However, th
(including the support system
total weight of the vehicle be
When transporting heavy
normal vehicle behaviour du
increased wind resistance mu
able speed and driving style
For those vehicles fitted w
with the load on the roof rack
Fig. 124 Partition net
Fig. 125 Anchor rings for the separation net
Air conditioning156
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
e has reached its operating temperature.
ed off automatically approximately 20 minutes
also be switched off beforehand by pushing
vents strong odours in the outside air from
r example when passing through a tunnel or in
. 126 Heating controls on the dash panel
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Air conditioning
Heating
Operating instructions
Using the controls fig. 126 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the blower speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engin
Heated rear window
This function will be switch
after being switched on. It can
the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode pre
entering the vehicle interior, fo
queuing traffic .
Fig
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Air conditioning 157
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode
is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air
recirculation mode should not be connected.
Air distribution to the upper body
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the knob . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Note Please observe the general notes page 166.
A4
A5
Air conditioning158
window The heating will be switched off auto-
0 minutes after switching on. It can also be
y pushing the button.
tion mode page 160
page 159
our speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
e lowest speed when driving slowly.
ust be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. od visibility. Please familiarise yourself with eating and ventilation system, including the
r the windscreens.
. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the blower is switched on.
Using the knobs fig. 127 and and knob you can set
the temperature, air distribution and blower speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector page 159
button Air conditioning system on/off page 159
button Heated rear
matically approximately 2
switched off beforehand b
Button Air recircula
Air distribution control Blower switch. There are f
should always be set at th
WARNING
For road safety all windows m This is essential to ensure go the correct operation of the h anti-fog/defrost functions fo
Fig
A1 A5 A6
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3
A4
A5
A6
Air conditioning 159
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
itioner using the button page 158,
elector anti-clockwise until the desired
ed.
to one of the settings 1-4.
g. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Note Please observe the general notes page 166.
Heating and cooling the interior
Interior heating
Turn the temperature selector fig. 128 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
Switch on the air cond
fig. 127 .
Turn the temperature s
cooling output is reach
Turn the blower switch
Fi
A1
AC
Air conditioning160
nts and prevents misting of the windows when
gh.
cannot be switched on this may be caused by
.
below +3 C.
compressor has been temporarily switched
t temperature is too high.
faulty.
. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-
.
. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the footwell) and (to the windscreen and to the
footwell).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupa
the ambient air humidity is hi
If the air conditioning system
the following reasons:
The engine is not running.
The blower is switched off
The outside temperature is
The air conditioning system
off because the engine coolan
The air conditioner fuse is
Another fault in the vehicle
ised workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outside
Fig
Air conditioning 161
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Air recirculation mode page 160, fig. 129 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the vehicle rather than
the cold air from outside.
With high outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather
than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Air conditioning162
ted separately for the left and right sides of the
tion for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
cted at the windscreen. The air recirculation
be switched off as soon as the defrost function
atures over 3 C, the air conditioning system
atically in order to dehumidify the air. The
the symbol appears on the radio or navigator
tribution
stribution
tribution
. 130 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioner settings for the left and right.
The air conditioner controls the temperature when the engine is
running and the blower is switched on.
Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 130 in order to adjust
the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand side
respectively.
The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjus
vehicle interior.
Button defrost func
outside the vehicle is dire
mode, if switched on, will
is switched on. At temper
will be switched on autom
button is lit in yellow and
display.
button Upper air dis
button Centre air di
button Lower air dis
Fig
A1
A2
A3
A4
Air conditioning 163
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
formation
limatronic system can be displayed
d navigation screen mounted at
Fig. 131 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic
Fig. 132 Radio display with information about Climatronic
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
button Manual air recirculation mode
button Heated rear window The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control page 164
button - Dual zone synchroniser
button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 165
Blower control page 165
button Switches on the air conditioning system
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note Please observe the general notes page 166.
Viewing Climatronic in
Information about the C
on the radio or radio an
factory.
A5
A6
A7 AUTO
A8 DUAL
A9 OFF
A10
A11 AC
Air conditioning164
htly higher or lower depending on the ambient
ant temperature. The temperature of the air
ower speed and the air distribution are regu-
m also considers the sunlight radiation, so
djustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost
fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the
ff whenever an adjustment is made using the
, air flow or or the air recirculation button
inue to be regulated within the parameters
.
s:
alculates the air flow for two people.
alculates the air flow for more than two
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same
as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
Press page 162, fig. 130. AUTO High is shown on the
radio display (high fan speed).
Press again page 162, fig. 130. AUTO Low is shown
on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
When a temperature of 22 C (72 F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable
interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or
particular circumstances. The inside temperature can be set between +18 C
(64 F) and +26 C (80 F). These are approximate temperatures and the
actual temperature may be slig
conditions.
Climatronic maintains a const
supplied to the interior, the bl
lated automatically. The syste
there is no need for manual rea
always provides the best com
year.
Automatic mode is switched o
buttons for the air distribution
. The temperature will cont
manually selected by the user
Note There are two automatic mode
Automatic mode LO: This c
Automatic mode HI: This c
people.
AUTO
AUTO
Air conditioning 165
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
.
(80 F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
t maximum heating output and the temperature
freely using the control . Always have the
g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
d using the buttons , and . It is also
ome of the air vents separately.
g on and off
ED lit), the air conditioning system is on.
ED off), the air conditioning system is off.
g. 133 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls.
A10
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required
Switching on manual mode
To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 133 to
or press the air flow control . The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.
The inside temperature can be set between +18 C (64 F) and +26 C (80 F).
These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may be
slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 18 C (64 F) is selected, the display switches to LO In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 26 C
this setting the system runs a
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted
blower running at a low settin
vehicle. Pushing the button
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjuste
possible to open and close s
Switching the air conditionin
When the button is on (L
When the button is off (L
Fi
A1
A5 A10
AC
AC
Air conditioning166
es, the air recirculation increases the effective-
stem by cooling the air inside the vehicle rather
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
air recirculation mode should not be
cold air from the outside enters the vehicle g system is switched off, the windows can never leave the air recirculation mode risk of accident).
d particulate filter and active carbon filter)
purities in the outside air, including dust and
with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
als specified in the Service Schedule.
maturely due to use in areas reaching very high
er must be changed more frequently than
.
tem is switched on, not only the temperature,
e vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
When the button is off, the air conditioning system is switched off to save
fuel. The temperature continues to self-regulate. The set temperature can
then only be reached if it is higher than the outside temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 C and passenger side
temperature 23 C.
When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22 C and passenger side
temperature 22 C.
If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the
function is automatically activated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
Press the button page 165, fig. 133 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display .
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam.
With low outside temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the vehicle rather than
the air from outside.
With high outside temperatur
ness of the air conditioning sy
than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is
this remains active. When the
towards the windscreen mode
vated. For safety reasons, the
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditionin quickly mist over. Therefore, switched on for a long time (
General notes
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combine
serves as a barrier against im
pollen.
For the air conditioner to work
must be replaced at the interv
If the filter loses efficiency pre
pollution levels, the pollen filt
stated in the Service Schedule
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning sys
but also the air humidity in th
AC
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
A2
Air conditioning 167
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s through the vehicle interior and is extracted
pose. Therefore, do not cover these slots with
ects.
tes most effectively with the windows and the
d. However, if the temperature inside the vehicle
n, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening
.
circulation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
s a residue on the evaporator, producing a
.
the air conditioning at least once a month, to
and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
orised Service Centre should be consulted to
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
The engine is not running.
The button is disconnected.
The outside temperature is below +3 C.
The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a special-
ised workshop.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioner is damaged, switch it off with the
button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a specialised
workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special
tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle
underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to
suspect a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
windows from misting over.
The air from the vents flow
by slots designed for this pur
items of clothing or other obj
The air conditioner opera
sliding/tilting sunroof* close
is excessive because of the su
the windows for a short time
Do not smoke while air re
air conditioning system leave
permanent unpleasant odour
It is advisable to connect
lubricate the system gaskets
capacity is detected, an Auth
check the system.
AC
AC
Driving168
the correct position.
e steering column fig. 134 down
el until the correct position is set
again firmly .
ing column adjustment function and an incor- lt in serious injury.
eering column should be adjusted only when
Fig. 135 Proper sitting position for driver
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat to
Push the lever under th
.
Adjust the steering whe
fig. 135.
Then push the lever up
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steer rect seating position can resu
To avoid accidents, the st the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 134 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Driving 169
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
gramme (ESP)*
safer in certain situations.
amme (ESP) contains the electronic differential
ntrol system (TCS). The ESP function works
arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
ally when the engine is started.
cannot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is
ff.
hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
hains,
Fig. 136 Detailed view of the centre console: ESP button
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 168, fig. 135. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 oclock and 3 oclock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 oclock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic Stability Pro
ESP helps make driving
The Electronic Stability Progr
lock (EDL) and the traction co
together with the ABS. Both w
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatic
The ESP is always active, and
only possible to switch TCS o
The TCS can be deactivated w
For example:
When driving with snow c
WARNING (continued)
Driving170
key
lock
ignition and the engine are OFF and the
te without the ignition key, turn the steering
dible sound. You should always lock the
e your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
glow plug system on
sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned
sition to position , move the steering
osens up.
Fig. 137 Ignition key positions
A0
A1
A0 A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
when the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 187, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition
Ignition switched off, steering
In this position fig. 137 the
steering may get locked.
For the Steering lock to opera
wheel until it locks with an au
steering wheel when you leav
theft .
Switching the ignition or the
Turn the ignition key to this po
or it is difficult to turn from po
wheel back and forth until it lo
Driving 171
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ted again automatically as soon as you pull the
d using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.
icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
ping the engine
started using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
y and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting page 170 position.
y as soon as the engine starts; the starter
with the engine.
e, you may need to slightly press down the
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activa
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be starte
Note A perfect operation of the veh
Starting and stop
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal thoroughl
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not run on
After starting a very hot engin
accelerator.
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure ha
This is quite normal, and no c
A2
A0
A2
Driving172
tarted using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting position.
position page 170, fig. 137 . The
ight for engine pre-heating.
turns off, turn the key to position to
t press the accelerator.
y as soon as the engine starts, the starter
ed to run on with the engine.
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
the engine, see the page 268.
el engine
ing of the battery, do not use any other major
glow plugs are pre-heating.
e glow plug warning lamp page 81 goes out.
uel tank has been completely run dry
letely run dry, it may take longer than normal
engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
inate air first.
A1
A2
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,
the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 255, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions in page 268, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating
temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be s
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal thoroughly
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Turn the ignition key to
indicator lamp will l
When the warning lamp
start the engine. Do no
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not be allow
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure has
This is quite normal, and no c
If there are problems starting
Glow plug system for the dies
To avoid unnecessary discharg
electrical equipment while the
Start the engine as soon as th
Starting the engine after the f
If the fuel tank has been comp
(up to one minute) to start the
because the system must elim
Driving 173
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
f, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
at the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
exposure to solar radiation.
off until the vehicle is completely stationary.
nly when the engine is running. With the trength is needed to brake. As normal brake
ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may
immediately blocked once the key is removed ng wheel cannot be turned. Risk of accident.
nning under a heavy load for a long period, heat
compartment and cause engine damage. For
he engine for approx. 2 minutes before you
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions in page 268, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle.
Turn the ignition key to position page 170, fig. 137 .
After switching the engine of
minutes. It is also possible th
temperature increases due to
ment or due to its prolonged
WARNING
Never switch the engine
The brake servo works o engine switched off, more s operation cannot be perform exist.
The steering lock can be from the ignition. The steeri
Caution When the engine has been ru
can accumulate in the engine
this reason, you should idle t
switch it off.
A0
Driving174
tationary with the engine idling. Press the
.
o neutral and push the lever downwards.
he left, and then into the reverse position
r.
ngaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
ore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
n the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
ng, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a ch released.
ear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
e gear lever while driving. The pressure of your
ear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
e.
the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
The vehicle should be s
clutch down thoroughly
Place the gear lever int
Slide the gear lever to t
shown on the gear leve
The reverse gear can only be e
the engine is running and bef
with the clutch pressed down
The reverse lights light up whe
is on.
WARNING
When the engine is runni gear is engaged and the clut
Never select the reverse g dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on th
hand could cause premature w
When changing gear, you
unnecessary wear and damag
Do not hold the vehicle on
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 138 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox
Fig. 139 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox
Driving 175
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
/ DSG automatic gearbox has three
ogramme
ts a higher gear earlier rather than remain
nto position D to drive forwards
nto position R to reverse. This position is
es for reversing.
amme
tion S.
me, S, the programme is designed for a sports
hich changes up at higher engine speeds to use
Fig. 141 Programme selection
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox
programmes.
Selecting the economy pr
This programme selec
in a lower gear.
Put the selector lever i
Put the selector lever i
shared by all programm
Selecting the sport progr
Move the lever to posi
If you select the sport program
mode, that is, a programme w
Fig. 140 Centre console: Selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / DSG auto- matic gearbox
Driving176
rake pedal, at the same time press the
ever.
n the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
, the lock is automatically released in position
(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
more than one second then it is locked. With
s prevented passing from P and N to any other
brake pedal.
in the position P in order to remove the key.
tic gearbox* / DSG automatic
ears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 143 Driving
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 178.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Start the vehicle.
Press and release the b
button on the selector l
The lock is only activated whe
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds
N.
For rapid changes of position
lever remains in the position N the automatic lock, the lever i
gear without first pressing the
The selector lever must be put
Driving with an automa gearbox*
The drive and reverse g
Fig. 142 Deactivating the lock
Driving 177
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
cases, using the brake pedal to prevent
ehicle using another forward gear (engine
, release the brake and accelerate.
lower the gear must be for effective engine
ear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
e vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed
the gearbox changes to the next highest gear.
move the selector lever to the tiptronic gate to
eave the vehicle while the engine is running or any reason you must leave the vehicle with the andbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
ing and the positions D, S or R are selected, it icle with the brake pedal because the vehicle
hanging the position of the gear lever (risk of
r be moved into the positions R or P while .
p gradient, reduce speed and use the tiptronic r gear.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Driving
Press and hold the foot brake.
Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left
page 176, fig. 143).
Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
Press the brake pedal and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
Move the selector lever to position D and press to the right to put
the lever into tiptronic mode.
Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
Hold the vehicle, in all
rolling back.
Do not try to slow the v
braking).
Descending gradients
With the gear engaged
The steeper the gradient the
braking. For example, if 3rd g
braking is insufficient and th
does not become excessive,
Depress the brake pedal and
return to 3rd gear.
WARNING
The driver should never l with any gear selected. If for engine running, apply the h tion P.
When the engine is runn is necessary to hold the veh will creep at a low speed.
Never accelerate while c an accident).
The gear lever must neve moving (risk of an accident)
Before descending a stee programme to select a lowe
Driving178
nic mode*
ws the driver to select gears manu-
Fig. 144 Changing gear with tiptronic
Fig. 145 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.
The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.
Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.
Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
Changing gear in tiptro
The tiptronic system allo
ally
WARNING (continued)
Driving 179
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
l or sport programme using the steering wheel
78, fig. 145 are used in the normal or sport
hes temporarily to tiptronic mode. To exit
e right paddle lever towards the steering
second. You will also leave tiptronic mode if the
for a certain time.
he steering wheel can operate with the selector
the vehicle in motion.
imum acceleration.
own thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
e vehicle maximum acceleration.
gear until the engine reaches the maximum
the gear.
vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road ury.
hen using the kickdown features on slippery celeration, the vehicle could lose traction and
own feature only when traffic and weather d safely.
+ OFF
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
General information about driving in tiptronic mode.
Changing gear with the selector lever
Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the tiptronic gate page 178, fig. 144.
Press the gear lever forwards page 178, fig. 144 to select
a higher gear.
Press the gear lever back page 178, fig. 144 to select a
lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering
wheel to change up page 178, fig. 145.
Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change
down page 178, fig. 145.
Using the paddle levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving
mode regardless of the pre-selected driving mode.
General information about driving in tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox goes
into a higher gear a little before the engine reaches its maximum permitted
revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
will only change down when the engine cannot go over its maximum
permitted revolutions.
If tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox is in third gear and selector lever position
D, tiptronic mode will then also be in third gear.
Changing gears in the norma paddle levers
If the paddle levers page 1
programme, the system switc
tiptronic mode again, press th
wheel for approximately one
paddle levers are not moved
Note The gearbox controls on t
lever in any position and with
Kickdown feature
This feature allows max
If you press the accelerator d
changes down, depending on
take full advantage of give th
The gearbox does not change
determined engine speed for
WARNING
You could lose control of the surfaces. Risk of serious inj
Be particularly careful w road surfaces. With a fast ac skid.
You should use the kickd conditions allow it to be use
A+
A
A+
A
Driving180
s far as it will go in order to prevent you from
plied by mistake .
lights up when the handbrake is applied
The warning turns off when the handbrake is
with the handbrake on, the following
nstrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. You
ing signal.
to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The bly longer, because braking is only applied to ent!
sed, this will cause rear brakes overheating, of the brake system and could lead to an acci- ture wear on the rear brake pads.
efore you leave the vehicle. The 1st gear should
lways be firmly applied when the
points when parking the vehicle:
stop the vehicle.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly fig. 146.
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow fig. 146 and guide the handbrake lever down
fully .
Always apply the handbrake a
driving with the handbrake ap
The handbrake warning lamp
and the ignition switched on.
released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
message* will appear on the i
will also hear an acoustic warn
WARNING
Never use the handbrake braking distance is considera the rear wheels. Risk of accid
If it is only partially relea which can impair the function dent. This also causes prema
Caution Always apply the handbrake b
also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should a
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following
Use the brake pedal to
Fig. 146 Handbrake between the front seats
Driving 181
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.
luded in vehicles with ESP.
ng uphill.
conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed
The system is activated on selecting a gear.
the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained
he vehicle from moving backward when putting
time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.
reversing uphill.
hicle immediately after taking your foot off the y start to roll back under certain conditions.
se the hand brake immediately.
ess the brake pedal or use the hand brake
traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle y when starting off, hold the brake pedal down rting off.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Apply the handbrake.
The 1st gear should also be selected.
Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn
the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they
point towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
engaging 1st gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever.
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can
Hill-start aid*
This function is only inc
This device helps when starti
These are the basic operation
down and vehicle in neutral.
After removing your foot from
for a few seconds to prevent t
into gear. This short space of
This system also works when
WARNING
If you do not start the ve brake pedal, the vehicle ma Depress the brake pedal or u
If the engine stalls, depr immediately.
When following a line of from rolling back accidentall for a few seconds before sta
WARNING (continued)
Driving182
a towing bar, the parking aid system will not
nt of the reverse gear when pulling a trailer, as
will be plugged into the vehicle.
or some seconds when the reverse gear is
ere is a fault in the parking aid system.
ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal
emitted every time the system is reactivated
). Thus, the system ready indication will not
paired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon
acoustic warning signal, then the parking aid
not warn of obstacles.
s properly, the sensors must be kept clean and
ots in which obstacles may not be detected.
children and animals because the system will ys pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
placement for driver awareness. The driver for parking and other manoeuvres.
cles detected by the system may no longer be
e car moves closer, so the system will not give
inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Note Your Authorised Service or a specialised workshop can tell you if your vehicle
is equipped with this system.
Parking aid acoustic system*
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system will use an acoustic signal to warn of
the approach of any object towards the rear of the vehicle.
Description
The acoustic parking aid system will measure the distance between the rear
of the vehicle and any possible obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located
on the rear bumper. The measuring range of the sensors starts approximately and depending on the nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
side of the rear bumper: 0.8 m
middle of the rear bumper: 1.5 m
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic
signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reverse gear
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the
system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase
rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop
signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Trailer towing
For vehicles factory-fitted with
be activated by the engageme
the trailers electric connector
Possible faults
If a continuous beep sounds f
engaged, this indicates that th
If the fault continues until the
warning of the fault will not be
(by engaging the reverse gear
sound either. Have the fault re
as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no
loudspeaker is faulty and may
To ensure that the system work
free of ice and snow.
WARNING
The sensors have blind sp
Always look out for small not always detect them. Alwa dents.
The parking aid is not a re must take full responsibility
Caution Please note that low obsta
registered by the sensors as th
any further warning. Certain k
thin posts or trailer draw bars
Driving 183
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
the cruise control system if it is not possible
ntrol system when driving in dense traffic, on n roads with poor conditions (with ice, slippery l), as this could cause an accident.
control system off after using it in order to
et speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
ntain a constant speed when descending down-
e due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
always be detected by the system, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle
in such cases.
In some cases, obstacles with uniform edges and bumps may not be
detected immediately by the system due to their geometry. Take special care
of this type of obstacle (corners, rectangular objects, etc.), as they can cause
damage to the vehicle.
Be especially careful when manoeuvring into a corner between two
perpendicular walls. Carefully watch the approach of the wall to the side of
the vehicle (using the mirrors).
The parking aid system does not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-
vres.
External ultra-sonic sources (pneumatic drills, construction machinery,
other vehicles with PDC) may interfere with the operation of the system.
Periodic cleaning of the sensors, take care not to damage or scratch them.
When cleaning with high pressure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors
should be sprayed for only a very short period and from a distance of more
than 10 cm.
Cruise control*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range of 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use to drive at constant speed.
Do not use the cruise co roads with lots of bends or o surfaces, loose grit or grave
Always switch the cruise avoid an involuntary use.
It is dangerous to use a s traffic or weather conditions
Note The cruise control cannot mai
hill. The vehicle will accelerat
slow the vehicle.
Driving184
T/- of the rocker switch fig. 148
ave reached the speed you wish to set.
witch, the current speed is set and held
Fig. 148 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig. 147 to the left to ON.
Switching off the system
Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on
the instrument panel is lit.21)
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The
system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*
Setting speed*
Press the lower part SE once briefly when you h
When you release the rocker s
constant.
21) Depending on the model version.
Fig. 147 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
AB
Driving 185
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
h the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
tore the set speed. This will not be the case,
is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
tes. The speed will have to be stored again.
if you reduce speed by depressing the brake
control by pressing once on the upper part of the
185, fig. 149 .
speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
m temporarily*
l be switched off in the following situations:
essed,
AA
Fig. 150 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch fig. 149 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SET/ of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
When you increase speed wit
system will automatically res
however, if the vehicle speed
speed for longer than 5 minu
Cruise control is switched off
pedal. You can reactivate the
rocker switch RES/+ page
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions
Switching off the syste
The cruise control system wil
if the brake pedal is depr
Fig. 149 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AA
Driving186
ox
ed off by moving the control all the way to
ed), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
ox / DSG automatic gearbox*
ystem, the selector lever must be placed in one
, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
AB
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
when the lever is moved to the position CANCEL without reaching
the OFF position. Once the CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is
released and returns to its initial position.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ fig. 150 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
Vehicles with a manual gearb
The system is completely turn the right hand side (OFF engag
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearb
To completely disengage the s
of the following positions: P, N ignition turned off.
AB
AA
Fig. 151 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
Intelligent technology 187
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
(HBA)*
sist function (HBA) is only included in
s brake in time, but not with maximum force.
long braking distances.
system comes into action. When pressing the
tant interprets it as an emergency. It then very
ke pressure so that the ABS can be activated
thus reducing the braking distance.
n the brake pedal. The brake assist system
soon as you release the brake.
nly and continuously at a speed of more than 80
several times per second to warn vehicles
e braking, the hazard warning lights will come
hicle comes to a standstill. They switch off auto-
arts to move again.
gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Hydraulic Brake Assist
The Hydraulic Brake As
vehicles with ESP.
In an emergency, most driver
This results in unnecessarily
This is when the brake assist
brake pedal rapidly, the assis
quickly builds up the full bra
more quickly and efficiently,
Do not reduce the pressure o
switches off automatically as
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle is braked sudde
km/h, the brake light flashes
driving behind. If you continu
on automatically when the ve
matically when the vehicle st
WARNING
The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.
Intelligent technology188
rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
ce could even be longer if you brake on gravel
ippery surface.
m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.
is also determined by the tyres fitted
es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
(TCS)
em prevents the drive wheels from
cle is accelerating.
he traction control system during acceleration
help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
uring acceleration. The system works in the
tion with ABS. If a malfunction occurs in the
erative.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
tically when the engine is started. If necessary,
hing the button on the centre console.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicles active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessa
conditions. The braking distan
or on fresh snow covering a sl
WARNING
The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y
The effectiveness of ABS page 236.
If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.
Traction control system
The traction control syst
spinning when the vehi
Description and operation of t (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to
drive vehicles losing traction d
entire speed range in conjunc
ABS, the TCS will also be inop
TCS helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The TCS is switched on automa
it may be turned on or off pus
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 189
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
eshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
ed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
heel) receives less drive torque than the inner
certain situations the torque delivered to the
ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
er drive torque than it could transmit. This
ral grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer
tory.
signals, the XDS system is able to detect and
kes the inner wheel, thereby counteracting the
eel. This means that the drivers desired trajec-
ombination with the ESP and is always active,
ol, TCS, is disconnected.
ty Programme (ESP)*
Programme increases the vehicles
amme helps reduce the danger of skidding.
amme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
When the TCS is off, the warning lamp is lit. The TCS should normally
be left on. Only in exceptional circumstances, when the slipping of the wheels
is required, should it be disconnected, for example
With compact temporary spare wheel.
When using the snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The TCS should be switched on again as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driv
wheel to turn at a higher spe
that is turning faster (outer w
wheel. This may mean that in
inner wheel is too high, caus
outer wheel is receiving a low
causes an overall loss of late
or lengthening of the trajec
By using the ESP sensors and
correct this effect.
Through the ESP, the XDS bra
excess drive torque in this wh
tory is much more precise,
The XDS system operates in c
even when the traction contr
Electronic Stabili
General notes
The Electronic Stability
stability on the road.
The Electronic Stability Progr
The Electronic Stability Progr
Steering manoeuvre recomm
OFF
Intelligent technology190
functions correctly, all four wheels must be
differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
gine power when this is not desired.
e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
d TCS.
(ABS)
vents the wheels locking during braking
ck (EDL)*
al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
driven wheels starts spinning.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
ely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
nd distributing more driving force to the other
al.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*
ESP reduces the danger of skidding by braking the wheels individually.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
maintained (for instance, if the vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESP
compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids
the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
to destabilise its trajectory to the right or to the left. In this case the ESP
recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering
manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control
of the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, as this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that ESP
fitted with the same tyres. Any
cause the system to reduce en
Modifications to the vehicl
gear or any components affec
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an
Anti-lock brake system
The anti-lock brake system pre
page 188.
Electronic differential lo
The electronic differenti
tion caused if one of the
EDL helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The system will control the rev
sensors (in case of an EDL fau
page 82.
At speeds of up to approximat
ences in the speed of the drive
a slippery road surface on one
wheel which has lost traction a
driven wheel via the differenti
Intelligent technology 191
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
els, the engine power is distributed to
erates completely automatically. The propul-
ng the four wheels and adapted to the driving
.
ly designed to complement the superior engine
s the vehicle exceptional handling and perform-
rmal roads and in more difficult conditions, such
your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter
ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when
pected, mainly because this will give a better
are mandatory, this also applies to cars with all-
ive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
To prevent the disc brake of the braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
the EDL has been switched off.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicles stability.
Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL page 214.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
vehicle is accelerating page 188.
All-wheel drive*
On all-wheel drive mod
all four wheels
General notes
The all-wheel drive system op
sion force is distributed amo
style and the road conditions
The all-wheel drive is special
power. This combination give
ance capabilities, both on no
as snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its all-wheel drive,
conditions, even with the sta
that winter tyres or all-season
winter road conditions are ex
braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains
wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with all-wheel dr
circumference page 241.
WARNING
Even with all-wheel drive the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu
Intelligent technology192
/h and the windscreen wipers are on, the brake
ds the brake discs for a few seconds. This
wing - at regular intervals and allows a faster
n driving on wet roads.
in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or
braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or
nd brake pads. In this case the brakes should
pedal several times.
s can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle
hout using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
.
orrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build
hicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not
uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
s and disks by braking firmly a few times at a
.
d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest
e the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and
o apply more pressure on the brake pedal and
nces.
brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
red electronically.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres grip. Vehicle behaviour is no different from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on icy or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose contact with the road if the vehicle is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed when aqua- planing begins to warn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason and for that mentioned above, always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km;
first they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads or road salt
When the speed is over 80 km
system moves the pads towar
occurs - without the driver kno
response from the brakes whe
In certain conditions, such as
driving through water, the full
in winter by ice) on the discs a
be dried by pressing the brake
The effectiveness of the brake
is driven for some distance wit
on the road in winter. In this ca
has to wear off before braking
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for c
up on the brake pads if the ve
used very often.
If the brakes are not used freq
advisable to clean off the pad
moderately high speed
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel shoul
one of the two brake circuits h
specialised workshop and hav
remember that you will have t
allow for longer stopping dista
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the
The brake fluid level is monito
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 193
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ronic*)
t easier to turn the steering wheel
ning.
iver by reducing the force needed to turn the
ed with servotronic* power steering the degree
ted electronically according to road speed.
on working even if the servotronic* device fails.
ce will, however, no longer adapt to different
lating system is not working properly, this is
the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance
will be required than usual. The fault should be
rkshop as soon as possible.
if the engine is off. In this case the steering
rce to turn.
rning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this
n the power steering system. Turning the
ces a load on the system, which causes noise. It
eed of the engine.
do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
wise, there is a risk of damaging the power
e turned even if the power steering fails or the
tance when being towed). However, more effort
eering wheel.
malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a
n as possible.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
When applying the brakes to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, select a clear, dry road. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is
not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if
your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servot
Power steering makes i
when the engine is run
Power steering assists the dr
steering wheel. In cars equipp
of power assistance is regula
The power steering will keep
The degree of power assistan
speeds. If the electronic regu
most noticeable when turning
when parking), as more effort
corrected by a specialised wo
Power steering does not work
wheel requires much more fo
If the steering is held at its tu
will place an excessive load o
steering wheel to its limit pla
will also reduce the idling sp
Caution When the engine is running,
more than 15 seconds. Other
steering.
Note The steering wheel can b
engine is switched off (for ins
will be required to turn the st
If the system is leaking or
specialised workshop as soo
Intelligent technology194
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The
container is located in the engine compartment (front left). The correct fluid
level in the reservoir is important for the power steering to function properly.
The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.
Driving and the environment 195
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
raking distance
d braking distance are influenced by
oad conditions.
epends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
ends to a great extent on the conditions under
and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we
e thickness of your brake pads checked by an
re frequently than recommended in the Service
for example, after crossing areas of water, in
ashing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
re wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case the
essing the brake pedal several times.
d faults in the brake system increase the risk
run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also
s have to be changed further on.
n, or if you are driving on roads which have may be lower than normal.
s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km.
Up to 1000 kilometres
Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption
reduced.
Braking capacity and b
The braking capacity an
driving situations and r
The efficiency of the brakes d
of wear of the brake pads dep
which the vehicle is operated
drive in town traffic, drive sho
recommend that you have th
Authorised Service Centre mo
Plan.
If you drive with wet brakes,
heavy rainfall or even after w
lessened as the brake discs a
brakes should be dried by pr
WARNING
Longer braking distances an of accidents.
New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when the brake pad
If brakes are wet or froze been salted, braking power
On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down a long s
Driving and the environment196
do not replenish with too much engine oil
up engine oil .
start it, use jump leads if necessary
running or loss of power when the vehicle is
iately and have the vehicle inspected at the
. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will
ribed symptoms occur page 76. If this
er the exhaust system and escape into the envi-
ter can also be damaged by overheating.
es very high temperatures! There is a risk of
alytic converter could come into contact with rials under the vehicle.
nderseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the erter or the heat shields on the exhaust
ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
etely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
blems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
ause overheating and damage the catalytic
vironment ol system is working perfectly, there may be a
ust gas under some conditions. This depends
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of trans- mission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes.
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instructions page 214, Technical modifications.
If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
For engine oil changes,
page 224, Topping
Never tow the vehicle to
page 268.
If you notice misfiring, uneven
moving, reduce speed immed
nearest specialised workshop
light up when any of the desc
happens, unburnt fuel can ent
ronment. The catalytic conver
WARNING
The catalytic converter reach fire.
Never park where the cat dry grass or flammable mate
Do not apply additional u exhaust pipes, catalytic conv system. These materials cou
Caution Never run the fuel tank compl
supply may cause ignition pro
exhaust system, which could c
converter.
For the sake of the en Even when the emission contr
smell of sulphur from the exha
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment 197
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
matically and that you must carry out a cleaning
81.
ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come materials underneath the vehicle. Otherwise
ed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any diesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
m. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
e with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
ine or the fuel system.
gh sulphur content may significantly reduce the
iculate filter. Your Authorised Service Centre will
tries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
nvironmentally friendly
nmentally friendly driving
ntal pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
our driving style. By adopting an economical
the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
0-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce
are listed below.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
Your vehicle is fitted with a DPF (Diesel particulate filter) if the vehicle data
sticker (back cover of the Maintenance Programme) lists the PR code 7GG
or 7MG fig. 152.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the
exhaust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself.
If the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example,
multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the
indicator for the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light up. This
does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not
been able to regenerate auto
cycle, as indicated in page
WARNING
The diesel engine partic tures; the vehicle should be into contact with flammable there is a risk of fire.
Caution Your vehicle is not design
circumstances refuel with bio
the engine and the fuel syste
diesel producer in accordanc
not cause damage to the eng
Using diesel fuel with a hi
working life of the diesel part
be able to tell you which coun
Economical and e driving
Economical and enviro
Fuel consumption, environme
and tyres depend mostly on y
driving style and anticipating
reduce fuel consumption by 1
pollution while saving money
Fig. 152 Vehicle data sticker on back cover of the Maintenance Programme
Driving and the environment198
arantees that, before beginning a journey, you
e required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
f improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum
sale value.
onsume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
d emission of polluting gases, the engine and
should reach the optimum service tempera-
sumption is proportionally higher. The engine
nsumption does not normalise until having
metres. This is why we recommend avoiding
.
sures
tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
o low, fuel consumption can increase by as
er rolling resistance, under-inflation also
irs handling.
ays be checked when the tyres are cold.
r round as they increase fuel consumption by
put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
tment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
orted.
e for the sake of convenience, even when it is
of 100-120km/h your vehicle will use about
e extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero
(disconnection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the recommended gear indication that appears on
the instrument panel page 61.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
30 - 40seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear
and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up
phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.
Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work gu
will not consume more than th
engine gives you the benefit o
reliability and an enhanced re
A badly serviced engine can c
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption an
the exhaust filtration systems
ture.
With the engine cold, fuel con
does not warm up and fuel co
driven approximately four kilo
short trips whenever possible
Maintain the correct tyre pres
Bear in mind that keeping the
tyre pressure is just one bar to
much as 5%. Due to the great
increases tyre wear and impa
The tyre pressures should alw
Do not use winter tyres all yea
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will
checking the luggage compar
essary loads are being transp
A roof rack is often left in plac
no longer needed. At a speed
12% more fuel as a result of th
even when it is not in use.
Driving and the environment 199
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ers are rated in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO
can be recycled
rouped together for easy recycling
n manufacture
pounds in plastics
conditioner
aterials regulation: cadmium, lead, mercury,
or manufacturing plastic parts
g
cting the vehicles in transit
on
tensively for energy conversion and building
n reduced
paints
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples of
components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear
window heating or the seat heaters*.
Note If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to disconnect this
function.
It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than 60
km/h
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can
make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate
lining, causing a serious fault.
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand
brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will
prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suit-
able for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes will not
suffer.
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and production of your new Seat.
Design measures for economical recycling
Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
Increased use of single-grade materials
Plastic parts and elastom
11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used
Similar types of plastics g
Recycled materials used i
Reduction of volatile com
CFC-free refrigerant in air
Compliance with prohibited m chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material f
Solvent-free cavity sealin
Solvent-free wax for prote
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in producti
Surplus materials used ex
materials
Overall water consumptio
Heat recovery systems
The use of water-soluble
Driving and the environment200
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
therefore spare parts are not available or the Authorised Services can only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available at your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Trailer towing 201
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
s and drawbar loads that are given on the data
re for certification purposes only. The correct
l, which may be lower than these figures for the
he vehicle documents or in Section Tech-
so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
trailer must be secured to prevent them
um permissible pressure shown on the sticker
flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
anufacturers recommendations.
nough of the road behind the trailer with the
t the case, you should have additional mirrors
hould be mounted on hinged extension
o give sufficient vision to the rear.
trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
ween the normal inspection intervals if the
towing a trailer.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the vehicle is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already
have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory require-
ments for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing
bracket see page 203.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and there-
fore the vehicles climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air
density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every 1000 m of height. The gross combination weight is the actual weight of
the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer. When possible,
operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
The figures for trailer weight plate of the towing bracket a
figures for your specific mode
towing bracket, are given in t
nical Data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer
possible. Loads carried in the
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maxim
on the inside of the fuel tank
accordance with the trailer m
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see e
standard mirrors. If this is no
fitted. Both exterior mirrors s
brackets. Adjust the mirrors t
WARNING
Never transport people in a
Note Towing a trailer places ad
mend additional services bet
vehicle is used frequently for
Trailer towing202
trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
r or wind conditions. This applies especially
ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
top the snaking by increasing speed.
the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
cking. Select a low gear in due course before
This enables you to use the engine braking to
during prolonged slopes, driving in a low gear
s monitor the coolant temperature gauge
e*
ilise the trailer in case of skidding or rocking.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and
this reason, it is advisable not
an unfavourable road, weathe
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce spe
sign of snaking. Never try to s
Always brake in due course. If
brakes gently at first and then
caused by the trailer wheels lo
going down a steep downhill.
slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and
and high engine speed, alway
page 55.
Electronic Stability Programm
The ESP* system helps to stab
Trailer towing 203
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
Fig. 153 Attachment points for towing bracket
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Trailer towing204
correctly installed, there is serious danger of
se observe the instructions provided by the racket.
rectly installed, this could cause damage to the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
344 mm
531 mm
1044 mm
1040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicles elec-
trical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
If the towing bracket is in accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b
Caution If the power socket is incor
vehicles electrical system.
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 205
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
. The use of certain products may produce ld be used in well ventilated areas.
e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch ndbrake firmly and remove the key from the
, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
environment.
roducts should not be disposed of with ordinary
e disposal information on the package.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materials
remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil- dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using vehicle care products. Improper use could cause health prob-
lems or damage the vehicle noxious vapours; they shou
Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.
Before washing your veh the engine off, apply the ha ignition.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or the windows of
of water.
For the sake of the e When purchasing produc
which are not harmful to the
The waste from car care p
household waste. Observe th
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning206
rinse it off with water.
top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
ht pressure.
ve often with clean water.
ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.
anels etc. until last, using a different
ughly with water.
gently with a chamois leather.
y the rubber seals and their surfaces to
zing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
dden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
s page 195, Braking capacity and
e ignition switched off.
rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Vehicle exterior maintenance
Automatic car wash tunnel
The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an
automatic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions
such as closing the windows and sunroof.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs
and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
First soften the dirt and
Clean your vehicle from
or a brush. Use very lig
Rinse the sponge or glo
Special car shampoo sh
Leave the wheels, sill p
sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry the vehicle surface
In cold temperature, dr
prevent them from free
seals.
After washing the vehicle
After washing, avoid su
by braking several time
braking distance.
WARNING
Wash your vehicle with th
Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 207
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
distance for soft materials and painted
sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .
udden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
es page 195.
concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.
e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
an 60 C. This could damage the vehicle.
hicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
ainted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
he greater the wear on the material.
nce
s the paintwork.
r vehicle if water does not form small drops and
is clean.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially
provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying
bumpers.
Do not use a high pres
windows page 208.
Never use concentrate
After washing, avoid s
by braking several tim
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr
Water, ice and salt on th accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter th
To avoid damage to the ve
materials such as flexible hos
also important for bumpers p
the nozzle is to the surface, t
Vehicle paint maintena
Regular waxing protect
You need to apply wax to you
run off the paintwork when it
WARNING (continued)
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning208
c parts.
n plastic parts, clean them with approved
nd care products.
ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
liquid is accidentally spilled.
ontain solvents will damage the material.
xterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
ove snow from the windows and mirrors.
eather to dry the windows. The chamois
ces are not suitable to clean windows because
sits which could smear the windows.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Good quality hard wax products are available at your Authorised Service
Centre.
Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental
contaminants page 205. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain
wax compounds to seal the paint page 207, Vehicle paint maintenance.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plasti
If normal washing fails to clea
solvent-free plastic cleaning a
Caution The use of liquid air freshe
damage the plastic parts if the
Cleaning products which c
Cleaning windows and e
Cleaning windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to rem
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois l
leathers used on painted surfa
they are soiled with wax depo
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 209
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nce
looked after, they will not freeze so
ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
product to the rubber seals.
s, windows, bonnet and tailgate will remain
are treated with a suitable care product (for
lso prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
can freeze up in winter.
ou should only use spray with lubricating and
th a damp cloth.
ith a soft, dry cloth.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-
ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a
sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintena
If rubber seals are well
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to rem
2. Apply a specialist care
The rubber strips on the door
pliable and last longer if they
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will a
doors will be easier to open. I
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders y
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wi
2. Polish chrome parts w
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning210
st from alloy wheels.
ent to clean the wheel rims.
ound to the wheels.
ttention to preserve their appearance. If road
ten removed, the aluminium finish will be
ent for alloy wheels.
ents should not be used. If the protective
ying stones, the damaged area should be
lindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the
ident.
brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the
es page 195, Braking capacity and
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 195, Braking capacity and braking distance.
Alloy wheels
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake du
Use an acid free deterg
Every three months
Apply a hard wax comp
Alloy wheels require regular a
salt and brake dust are not of
impaired.
Always use an acid-free deterg
Car polish or other abrasive ag
coating is damaged, e.g. by fl
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cy and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc
Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash brakes by braking several tim braking distance.
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 211
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
is usually removed if the engine compartment
ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
ine compartment, always observe the safety
et, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake e key from the ignition.
before you clean the engine compartment.
underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims ds and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- comply could result in injury.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.
leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
be carried out at a specialised workshop or an
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to
check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
work and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehicle
is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection
is cleaned with grease remov
On commissioning this work,
components in the engine co
WARNING
When working in the eng warnings page 219.
Before opening the bonn firmly and always remove th
Allow the engine to cool
Do not clean the vehicle without protecting your han edged metal parts. Failure to
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits
The polluted water must be c
engine washing should only
adequate petrol station.
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning212
bric trim cleaning
m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
or with dry foam and a soft brush.
climate controls
ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
olution may be used.
ollen cloth with water and wipe over the
be removed using a mild soap solution
ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
k through the leather or soak into the
ft, dry cloth.
reated twice a year with a special leather-
in your Authorised Service Centre.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause injuries.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fa
Cloth seat covers and fabric tri
with a special interior cleaner
Cleaning the radio and
To clean the radio and/or clim
resistant dirt, a neutral soap s
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or wo
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can
(pure liquid soap; two t
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soa
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather maintenance
The leather should be t
care product, available
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning 213
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
lt up until it is dry.
ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .
e seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice s, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the ust be replaced by a specialised workshop.
a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ts to dry completely before rolling them up.
could become damaged.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this
natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-
quality natural leather are normal.
Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised
workshop.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belt cleaning
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow it to dry.
Do not roll the seat be
If large stains form on the bel
belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids
Check the condition of th that the belt webbing, fitting belts is damaged, the belt m
Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod
Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel
Otherwise, the belt retractors
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications214
onents that do not affect the control of the
box, laptop, ventilator fan, etc.), must bear the
ufacturer conformity declaration).
phone holders or cup holders, should never thin the working range, of the airbags. Other-
ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
tions
ys be carried out according to our
the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
, other indirect systems may be affected by the
ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
r vehicle registration documents.
es cannot be held liable for any damage
or work incorrectly performed.
d that all work should be performed by an
ng Genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend you to consult your Authorised
Service Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or
are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
drivers control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Unions authorisation symbol).
Any additional electrical comp vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator
CE mark (European Union man
WARNING
Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers, or wi wise, there is a danger of inju
Technical modifica
Modifications must alwa
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in networks
faults. This can seriously impa
nents, and also invalidate you
SEAT Authorised Service Centr
caused by modifications and/
For this reason, we recommen
Authorised Service Centre usi
sories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 215
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.
ne mountings to the surfaces covering the nge of the airbags. There is a high danger of ed.
instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a specialised
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac
Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ra injury if the airbag is trigger
Note Please observe the operating
radio.
Checking and refilling levels216
e right, until the point of feeling a click.
, without releasing the cap, clockwise
se the flap until it clicks into place. The
h an anti-loss attachment
he vehicle on the right.
operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
n fuel can be found there.
and can cause serious burns and other inju-
open flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.
o not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident
ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 55 litres. For all-wheel drive vehicles, the tank
capacity is approximately 60 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Hold the cap firmly with one hand, then insert the key into the
lock and rotate 180 to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to th
Turn the key in the lock
through 180.
Remove the key and clo
tank cap is secured wit
The tank flap is at the rear of t
If the automatic filler nozzle is
soon as the tank is full. Nev
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for your
fuel tank flap. Further notes o
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable ries.
Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca
Follow legal requireme
For safety reasons we d canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.
If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following
Fig. 154 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
ing to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
ters (EN = European Standard).
by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
, unit for determining the knock resistance of
ith a higher octane number than the one recom-
ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
er.
vehicle is given in the technical table for the
section.
28 may be mixed with small quantities of
ed bioethanol fuels available at commercial
e E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage
as they will damage the fuel system.
d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ll throttle can damage the engine when using
ower than the correct grade for the engine.
nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conform vehicles with catalytic conver
Fuel types are differentiated
= Research Octane Number
petrol). You may use petrol w
mended for your engine. How
consumption and engine pow
The correct fuel type for your
engine, in the Technical Data
Caution Petrol with standard EN 2
ethanol. However, the so-call
establishments with referenc
of ethanol, may not be used,
Even one tankful of leade
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and fu
petrol with an octane rating l
For the sake of the e Just one full tank of leaded fu
catalytic converter.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels218
n designed to be used exclusively with diesel
590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel
you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the
t the engine. Seek assistance from specialised
f these fuels may severely damage the fuel
ter.
el, difficulties may be experienced at tempera-
uel thickens due to wax separation. Therefore,
n some countries during the cold months. It can
w as -22 C.
atic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
racteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
country concerned regarding the type of diesel
l filter glow plug system, making it well
ter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
rovided you use winter-grade diesel which is
to such an extent that the engine will not start
C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
ners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the
engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-
tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system
clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = European Standard). It must
have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates the
ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling page 216.
Biodiesel*
Caution Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the
diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is
authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
The diesel engine has bee
fuel conforming to standard EN
oil or any other type of fuel. If
wrong type of fuel, do not star
personnel. The composition o
system and the engine.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in win
Winter diesel
When using summer diesel fu
tures below 0 C because the f
winter diesel fuel is available i
be used at temperatures as lo
In countries with different clim
has different temperature cha
Centre or filling stations in the
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fue
equipped for operation in win
operational to approx. -24 C, p
safe to -15 C.
However, if the fuel has waxed
at temperatures of under -24
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thin
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
the engine compartment, e.g. checking and k of injury and scalding as well as the risk of
f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining eam or coolant is emitted, then allow the lly opening the bonnet.
d remove the key from the ignition.
d move the gear lever to neutral or selector
the vehicle.
arts. There is a risk of burns.
ot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This
uits in the electrical system, particularly at the are attached page 269. The battery could
fan. It is temperature controlled and could en the engine has been switched off and the
on!
n the coolant reservoir when the engine is hot. ling system will be pressurised!
arms by covering the cap with a large, thick ping coolant and steam.
ve not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths partment.
rneath the vehicle, you must use suitable rt the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A
for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Working in the engine compartment
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the
engine must be carried out cautiously.
Before starting any work on the engine or in the engine compart-
ment:
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selector lever to position P.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down.
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.
6. Raise the bonnet. page 221
You should not do any work in the engine compartment unless you know
exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! Have the work
carried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain.
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For
this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions page 214. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a
hazardous area. .
WARNING
All work on the engine or in refilling fluids, involves a ris accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme burns. Wait until no more st engine to cool before carefu
Switch off the engine an
Apply the handbrake an lever to position P.
Keep children away from
Never touch hot engine p
Never spill liquids on a h is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circ points where the jump leads explode.
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh key removed from the igniti
Do not unscrew the cap o If the coolant is hot, the coo
Protect face, hands and cloth to protect against esca
Always make sure you ha and tools, in the engine com
If you have to work unde stands additionally to suppo hydraulic jack is insufficient injury.
Checking and refilling levels220
, have your vehicle inspected at a specialised
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following points:
Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and long hair do not get trapped in rotating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.
Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precautions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.
If work has to be carried out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- nents, you must observe the following safety notes in addition to the above warnings:
Always disconnect the battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when this is done, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked flames.
Always have a fire extinguisher on hand.
Caution When topping up service fluids, make sure not to mistake them. Using the
wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids
workshop. WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
t ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
pull the lever under the dash panel
in the direction indicated (arrow). The
d by a spring action .
he release lever (arrow) and open the
y and secure it in fixture designed for this
f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.
, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, net.
ine compartment, always observe the safety
tly
y and replace it in its support.
cm let it fall so it is locked.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonne
rest position.
To release the bonnet,
page 221, fig. 155
bonnet will be release
Lift the bonnet using t
bonnet.
Release the bonnet sta
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme
Wait until no more steam then carefully open the bon
When working in the eng warnings page 219.
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet sligh
Release the bonnet sta
At a height of about 30
Fig. 155 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.
Fig. 156 Arrester hook for bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels222
or your engine are listed in page 223, Oil
le (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
the back of the Maintenance Programme
at your vehicle has the LongLife service
s QG0 or QG2 the interval service is dependent
gLife*)
ve been developed which, depending on the
driving profiles, allow to extend the oil change
vals).
r extending the service intervals, it must only
ng indications:
fixed service intervals.
stances, if the engine oil level is too low
s not available, it is permitted to top up (once)
als page 223 (up to a maximum of 0.5
he LongLife service interval or it has been
y use oils for fixed service intervals, which also
roperties. In this case, your vehicle must be
of 1 year / 15,000 km (whatever comes first)
gramme.
es, if the engine oil level is too low
btain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
onforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
EA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
used in all seasons of the year except for those regions affected by extreme
cold.
As the use of good quality oil is necessary for the correct operation and long
service life of the engine, when it becomes necessary to replenish or change
the oil, always use an oil that complies with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should
appear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance
Programme, be performed by an Authorised Service Centre or a specialised
workshop.
The correct oil specifications f
properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexib
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on
booklet is QG1, this means th
programmed. If it has the code
on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (Lon
Special oils and processes ha
characteristics and individual
service (LongLife service inter
Because this oil is essential fo
be used observing the followi
Avoid mixing it with oil for
Only in exceptional circum
page 223 and LongLife oil i
with oil for fixed service interv litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have t
disabled (by request), you ma
appear in page 223, Oil p
serviced after a fixed interval
Booklet Maintenance Pro
In exceptional circumstanc
page 223 and you cannot o
put in a small quantity of oil c
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or AC
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
not covered by the warranty.
end finding an engine oil that conforms to the
ions and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
be available for a top-up if needed.
l level
indicates the level of the oil.
orizontal position.
Fig. 157 Engine oil dipstick
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
The Maintenance Programme states whether your vehicle is fitted with a
diesel particulate filter.
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash formation, may be used in
diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will
cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
page 223 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01,
VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3 / ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be
caused by these additives is
Note Before a long trip, we recomm
corresponding VW specificat
correct engine oil will always
Checking the engine oi
The engine oil dipstick
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a h
Engine type Specification
Petrol without flexible service inter-
val
VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Petrol with flexible service interval
(LongLife)
VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines without Particulate
filter (DPF)
VW 505 01 / VW 506 01 / VW 507 00
Diesel. Engines with particulate filter
(DPF)
With or without flexible service inter-
val (with or without LongLife)a)
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
Checking and refilling levels224
a do not start the engine. This could result
catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
all quantities of oil.
, read and observe the warnings in
rking in the engine compartment on
ler opening fig. 158.
unts, using the correct oil.
AA
Fig. 158 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached and stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Then pull it out once more and check the oil level fig. 157. Top
up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after the zone
Oil level in area
Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used,
oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 219.
Caution If the oil level is above the are
in damage to the engine and
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with sm
Before opening the bonnet
Safety instructions on wo
page 219.
Unscrew cap from oil fil
Top-up oil in small amo
AA
AB
AA
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
changed at the intervals given in the
the engine oil changed by an Authorised
hown in the Maintenance Programme.
if you have the specialist knowledge required!
et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine compartment.
ol down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
void injuries caused by splashes of oil.
rain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.
ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of
with engine oil. This could result in engine
by the use of such additives would not be
ty.
nvironment roblems, the necessary special tools and
d, we recommend that you have the engine oil
orised Service Centre.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration page 279.
Engine oil specification page 222.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be
service schedule.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are s
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself
Before opening the bonn page 219, Safety instruc
Wait for the engine to co
Wear eye protection to a
When removing the oil d zontal to help prevent oil fro
Wash your skin thorough
Engine oil is poisonous! the reach of children.
Caution No additives should be used
damage. Any damage caused
covered by the factory warran
For the sake of the e Because of the disposal p
specialist knowledge require
and filter changed by an Auth
AB
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels226
e added in sufficient quantities to provide coldest ambient temperatures that can be utside temperatures, the coolant could breakdown. As the heater would not work ing to death.
onsiderably inferior corrosion protection. The
ing system can lead to a loss of coolant,
e engine.
) can be mixed with the G12 (red) or G11 addi-
G11.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large
enough to hold all the engine oil.
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our G12+ additive or an additive with the TT-VW 774 F specification (it has a
purple colour). This mixture provides the necessary freeze protection down to
-25 C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if freeze
protection is not required.
If greater freeze protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the G12+ additive can be increased. However, the percentage of coolant addi-
tives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the freeze protection. It
would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60% additive will give
antifreeze protection to approx. -40 C.
WARNING
The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
The G12+ additive must b anti-freeze protection at the expected. At extremely cold o freeze, causing the vehicle to either, there is a risk of freez
Caution Other additives may give c
resulting corrosion in the cool
causing serious damage to th
The G12+ additive (purple
tive. Never mix G12 (red) with
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
MIN mark, top up with coolant.
liquid.
AX mark.
sion tank
n tightly.
pansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
ion page 279.
eets the required specifications page 226.
additive if G12+ additive is not available. In this
g the coolant concentration back up to the
ible by putting in the specified additive
nt.
ark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
en the engine is hot.
yed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)
ngine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 219.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
If the level is below the
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant
Do not fill above the M
Closing the coolant expan
Screw the cap on agai
The position of the coolant ex
engine compartment illustrat
Make sure that the coolant m
Do not use a different type of
case use only water and brin
correct level as soon as poss
page 226.
Always top up with new coola
Do not fill above the MAX m
out of the cooling system wh
The coolant additive G12+ (d
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 219.
Fig. 159 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels228
indscreen wiper blades
he windscreen should always be
.
e headlight washers are supplied with fluid
luid container in the engine compartment.
right-hand side of the engine compartment.
ean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
roduct to the windscreen washer fluid.
g products exist on the market with high deter-
s, these may be added all-year-round. Please
s on the packaging.
Fig. 160 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down
before putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large
coolant losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a special-
ised workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Other-
wise, there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and w
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning t
mixed with washer fluid
The windscreen washer and th
from the windscreen washer f
The reservoir is located on the
Plain water is not enough to cl
mend that you always add a p
Approved windscreen cleanin
gent and anti-freeze propertie
follow the dilution instruction
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
iper blades
blades are in perfect condition, you
roved visibility. Damaged wiper
ced immediately.
Fig. 161 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion
Fig. 162 Changing the front wiper blades
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 219.
Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen w
If the windscreen wiper
will benefit from an imp
blades should be repla
Checking and refilling levels230
good visibility through all windows!
er blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
en wipers could scratch the windscreen.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
damage the windscreen wiper blades.
n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
wipers forward unless they are in the service
t could be damaged.
ved to the service position only when the
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Service position (For changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have
elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent
wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service
position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of
the arrow page 229, fig. 162
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the ignition
is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driving
faster than 6 km/h.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-
ised workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
Clean the windscreen wip
The wiper blades should
Caution Damaged or dirty windscre
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the windows. This could
Never move the windscree
could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscreen
position. Otherwise the bonne
Note The wiper arms can be mo
bonnet is properly closed.
Checking and refilling levels 231
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e good visibility through all windows!
per blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
w wiper could scratch the rear window.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
en wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the rear wiper arm.
Release the blade by pulling it in the direction of the arrow .
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it
clicks into place.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you hav
Clean the windscreen wi
The wiper blades should
Caution A damaged or dirty windo
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the window.
Never move the windscre
Fig. 163 Changing the rear window wiper blade
A2
Checking and refilling levels232
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
ak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
brake fluid level is too low page 76.
check the brake fluid level, read and observe
d
mme indicates the brake fluid
the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
lease read and follow the warnings in
g in the engine compartment on page 219 in
ing in the engine compartment.
In the course of time, it will absorb water from
ntent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
o considerably reduces the boiling point of the
rakes may then cause a vapour lock which
t.
ly brake fluid compliant with US standard
end the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment illustration page 279. The brake fluid reservoir has a black
and yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes dow
MIN mark, there may be a le
ment panel will warn you if the
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to the warnings page 219.
Changing the brake flui
The Maintenance Progra
change intervals.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, p
Safety instructions on workin
section Safety notes for work
Brake fluid absorbs moisture.
the ambient air. If the water co
system could corrode. This als
brake fluid. Heavy use of the b
could impair the braking effec
It is important that you use on
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recomm
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old
Fig. 164 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels 233
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
the battery
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical
tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralise any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
ction
very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective
protection!
pen flames and smoking are prohibited!
sive mixture of gases is released when the bat-
arge.
away from acid and batteries!
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 219.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the effi- ciency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an acci- dent.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment The brake pads and fluid must be collected and disposed of according the
applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary
equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing of this waste
material.
Vehicle battery
Warnings on handling
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:
Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.
Fires, sparks, open flame cables and electrical equipm
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye prote
Battery acid is
gloves and eye
Fires, sparks, o
A highly explo
tery is under ch
Keep children
Checking and refilling levels234
g in cold conditions for a long period, protect
freezes it will be damaged.
e level
uld be checked regularly in high-
countries and in older batteries.
t and the battery cover in Safety
in the engine compartment on
rnings on handling the battery on
y in the "magic eye" on the top of the
n the window, tap the window gently until
hown in the corresponding engine compart-
ated on the top of the battery changes colour,
e and electrolyte level of the battery.
:
s.
he battery must be replaced. Contact a special-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left standin
the battery from freezing. If it
Checking the electrolyt
The electrolyte level sho
mileage vehicles, in hot
Open the engine bonne
instructions on working
page 219 in Wa
page 233.
Check the colour displa
battery.
If there are air bubbles i
they disperse.
The position of the battery is s
ment diagram page 279.
The magic eye indicator, loc
depending on the charge stat
There are two different colours
Black: correct charge statu
Transparent/clear yellow: t
ised workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 235
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nvironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
iately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a specialised workshop between
the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 233.
For the sake of the e Batteries contain toxic substa
must be disposed of appropr
household waste.
Wheels and tyres236
ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual
g to one side, this may indicate that one of the
ould be checked immediately by an Authorised
ttern
ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
rve the direction of rotation indicated when
ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
wear.
ximum grip during the first 500 km. Drive possible accidents.
tyres. This may cause an accident.
ations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.
e can be seen on the sticker on the
nflation pressure from the sticker. The
tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the
same direction of rotation when they are installed again.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres must be run in page 195.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is o
vibrations or the vehicle pullin
tyres is damaged. The tyres sh
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pa
An arrow on the tyre sidewall i
directional tread. Always obse
fitting the wheel. This guarant
planing, excessive noise and
WARNING
New tyres do not have ma particularly carefully to avoid
Never drive with damaged
If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressur
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre i
values refer to Summer
bar to the values given
Wheels and tyres 237
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ng
toring system constantly checks the
ensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by
uency spectrum of each wheel.
e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
ly.
are changed or one or more tyres are changed,
y pressing the SET switch on the centre console.
n the event of a loss of pressure by means of
instrument panel display. The system uses ESP
epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
ach 10 C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
being driven and the tyre pressure will rise
you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
ely at ambient temperature).
re monitoring system works reliably, you should
st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
eference values) in the system.
bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the
slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitori
The tyre pressure moni
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed s
analysing the speed and freq
For optimum performance, us
adjust tyre pressures regular
Whenever the tyre pressures
the system should be Reset b
The system warns the driver i
symbols and messages in the
page 189.
Note that tyre pressure also d
increases about 0.1 bar for e
heats up while the vehicle is
accordingly. For this reason,
they are cold (i.e. approximat
To ensure that the tyre pressu
check and, if necessary, adju
store the correct pressures (r
A tyre pressure information la
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the
Wheels and tyres238
dependent on tyre pressure, driving
Fig. 165 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 166 Diagram for changing wheels
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure of at least
one tyre is insufficient.
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the tyre(s).
Change the wheel if necessary page 246.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is
style and fitting.
Wheels and tyres 239
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn
h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-
ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.
oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
res must be replaced immediately!
nvironment ase fuel consumption.
to continue driving even with a punc-
ity of cases.
-fitted with run-flat tyres22) the loss of tyre
he instrument panel.
country.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
page 238, fig. 165, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the
tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
page 236.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown page 238, fig. 166. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of
The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.
If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce
Keep chemicals such as
Damaged wheels and ty
For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre
Run-flat tyres
Run-flat tyres allow you
tured tyre, in the major
In vehicles that are factory
pressure is indicated on t
22) Depending upon version and
Wheels and tyres240
of the tyres,
to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?
severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
riving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
ff smoke.
onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.
id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
les (for example kerbs) or potholes.
eing driven in emergency conditions, the is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
eflate on losing pressure because they are
ides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be
ion.
sed on front tyres used in emergency
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)
Leave the ESP/TCS (Electronic Stability Programme) switched on,
or switch on page 189.
Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and replace it
if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means
that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
smoke is coming from one
there is a smell of rubber,
the vehicle vibrates,
there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible
If one of the tyres has been
has been badly damaged ther
off and cause damage to the f
It is also advisable to stop d
starts overheating and gives o
WARNING
When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.
The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o
Avoid sharp turns and rap
Avoid driving over obstac
If one or more tyres are b driving quality of the vehicle
Note The run-flat tyres do not d
supported on the reinforced s
detected with a visual inspect
Snow chains must not be u
conditions.
Wheels and tyres 241
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
e has full information on the technical require-
nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
ive, all four tyres must always be fitted with tyres
read pattern, as otherwise the driveline can be
rences in the wheel speeds. For the same
el with the same tyre dimensions as the normal
e the factory-supplied compact temporary spare
use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
e on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you uld drive slowly and with extra care at all
ose with an unknown history of use.
ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.
fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.
nvironment f according to the laws in the country concerned.
not generally possible to use the wheels from
apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicles design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centr
ments when installing or cha
On vehicles with all-wheel dr of the same type, make and t
damaged by continuous diffe
reason, only use a spare whe
road wheels. You may also us
wheel.
WARNING
We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicl have no alternative, you sho times.
Never use old tyres or th
If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. This
All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t
For the sake of the e Old tyres must be disposed o
Note For technical reasons, it is
other vehicles. This can also
Wheels and tyres242
ue for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is
e the vehicles handling on snow and
es will considerably improve the vehicles
er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
and snow.
o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
e sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicles regis-
adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
pply to winter tyres.
eness when the tread is worn down to a depth
241, New tyres and wheels determines the
ter tyres:
hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
sticker in the drivers field of view. These
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicles type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period
of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as
possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model page 214.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Caution The prescribed tightening torq
120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improv
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyr
handling. The design of summ
pattern) gives less grip on ice
Winter tyres must be inflated t
specified for summer tyres (se
Winter tyres must be fitted on
Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r
vehicle documentation also a
Winter tyres lose their effectiv
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code page
following speed limits for win
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles w
tyre must have an appropriate
Wheels and tyres 243
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ectly tightened in accordance with the manu- will prevent the chains coming into contact
rive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will
tyres and wear out very quickly.
eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
ntry should be followed.
sk your Authorised Service Centre for informa-
l, tyre and snow chain size.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
page 241, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear
so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for 205/55R16
tyres. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch link chains which do not
protrude more than 15 mm page 241. For 225/50R17 tyres, the use of
snow chains is not permitted.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
All-wheel drive: Where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this
normally also applies to cars with all-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be
fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles with all-wheel drive).
WARNING
Snow chains should be corr facturers instructions. This with the wheel housing.
Caution Remove the snow chains to d
impair handling, damage the
Note In some countries, the sp
legal requirements of the cou
We recommend that you a
tion about appropriate whee
If and when244
* is only designed for changing wheels on this t to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other
, level ground.
en the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.
underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
Take the on-board tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing eye
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are
optional extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.
The factory-supplied jack model. On no account attemp loads. Risk of injury.
Use the jack* only on firm
Never start the engine wh
If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis
WARNING (continued)
If and when 245
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
hains must not be used on the compact tempo-
of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit
in place of one of the rear wheels. You can then
wheel taken from the rear and use this wheel to
heel.
be checked and corrected as soon as possible. e for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 other tyre dimensions please refer to the label so could result in an accident.
0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-
mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
rmal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on e wheel rim.
hicles not including a spare wheel) is
anel in the luggage compartment.
re, your vehicle is equipped with the Tyre
a container with sealing compound to repair the
generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the temporary spare wheel is only
intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The standard-size
road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel.
This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot
be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow c
rary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one
the compact temporary spare
attach the snow chains to the
replace the punctured front w
WARNING
The tyre pressures must The emergency tyre pressur 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all on the fuel cap. Failure to do
Do not drive faster than 8
Avoid heavy acceleration dent.
Never use two or more co accident.
No other type of tyre (no the compact temporary spar
Tyre repair kit
The tyre repair kit (for ve
stored under the floor p
In the event of a punctured ty
Mobility System.
The tyre repair kit consists of
puncture and a compressor to
Fig. 167 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel
If and when246
on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.
on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent
ents when doing so.
ribed below
o see page 247.
s.
ck at the corresponding point.
then fit the spare wheel.
firmly with the box spanner.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Changing a wheel
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an
Caution If you have to change the tyre
wheel being changed by placi
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note Please observe legal requirem
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as desc
Pull off the hub cap. Als
Slacken the wheel bolt
Raise the car with the ja
Remove the wheel and
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts
Replace the hub cap.
If and when 247
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e removed to gain access to the wheel
ook from the tools into the designated
the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
Fig. 168 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be
120 Nm.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must b
bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction h ring, located in one of
fig. 168.
Pull off the hub cap.
If and when248
lts
loosened before raising the vehicle.
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.
y the end turn it about one full turn to the
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.
close to the end and turn the bolt to the
o unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 169 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bo
The wheel bolts must be
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grasp the box spanner b
left fig. 169.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grasp the box spanner
right until it is secured.
An adapter is required t
bolts.
If and when 249
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, otherwise there is a risk of accident.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
If and when250
t under the door sill closest to the wheel
70.
jacking point and turn the crank until the
ly below the vertical rib under the door
e arm of the jack fits around the rib under
vable base plate of the jack is flat on the
efective wheel is just clear of the ground.
of the door sills mark the jacking points
acking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
ed on solid ground offering good support. Use
essary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
lar to prevent the jack from slipping.
at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to ent.
ed if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
Locate the jacking poin
to be changed fig. 1
Place the jack under the
arm of the jack is direct
sill.
Align the jack so that th
the door sill and the mo
ground fig. 171.
Raise the jack until the d
Recesses at the front and rear
fig. 170. There is only one j
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the
Therefore, the jack must be fitt
a large and stable base, if nec
tiles) use a rubber mat or simi
WARNING
Take all precautions so th do so could result in an accid
The vehicle can be damag jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly
Fig. 170 Jack position points
Fig. 171 Fitting the jack
If and when 251
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e wheel
the wheel, the following tasks must be
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
ribed below:
g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
ol) and place them on a clean surface
lts and tighten them lightly using the
e screwdriver handle.
Fig. 173 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 251 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Jack position points for vehicles with sill panel trim*
Vehicles with plastic sill panel trim, with cover*
Remove the cap to access the anchor point for the vehicle jack
fig. 172.
Pull on the cover and remove it from its allotment in the direction
of the arrow fig. 172.
Once the cover has been released, it will remain connected to its
strap so that is not lost.
Removing and fitting th
For removal and fitting
completed.
After loosening the wheel
change the wheel as desc
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts usin
screwdriver (vehicle to
fig. 173.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bo
hexagonal socket in th
Fig. 172 Plastic sill panel trim with jack allotment cover
AA
If and when252
the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
ar as it will go over the adapter.
heel bolt as appropriate.
eft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
oted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
ead pattern
ad pattern must be fitted so that they
ction.
be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
n. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
This is important so that these tyres can give
ssive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
rly important when driving on wet roads.
s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 252 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Insert the adapter onto
will go fig. 174.
Fit the box spanner as f
Loosen or tighten the w
Code
The code number of the anti-th
the adaptor.
The code number should be n
using the code number that a
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tr
Tyres with directional tre
rotate in the correct dire
A directional tread pattern can
point in the direction of rotatio
cated when fitting the wheel.
maximum grip and avoid exce
If, in an emergency, you have
direction, you must drive extre
performance. This is particula
To benefit from the advantage
defective tyre should be repla
rotate in the correct direction.
Fig. 174 Anti-theft wheel bolt
If and when 253
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
nvironment lant can, go to a specialised waste service or to
re the product can be recycled in an appropriate
, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it off like a
tated on the sealing compound can. Have the
d by a specialised workshop.
nce if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
pound.
aken before repairing a tyre.
r puncture, park the vehicle as far away
as possible.
irmly.
ut the selector lever to position P.
leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
behind the roadside crash barrier).
is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
nd safety notes.
from the affected wheel.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 253 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Tyre repair kit (Tyre Mobility System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound
container.
You will also find instructions for operating the compressor.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the tyre has been damaged by driving the vehicle after the tyre has lost its air.
Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning compressor and sealing compound carefully.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit- able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available specialised workshop.
For the sake of the e If you have to dispose of a sea
a SEAT Technical Service, whe
waste container.
Note If sealant should leak out
piece of foil.
Observe the expiry date s
sealing compound exchange
Seek professional assista
possible with the sealing com
Preparation work
Certain steps must be t
If you have a flat tyre o
from the flow of traffic
Apply the handbrake f
Engage first gear, or p
All passengers should
safe area (for instance
Check whether a repair
General information a
Unscrew inflation cap
If and when254
monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
r hose from the valve.
from the socket.
proper storing location.
with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
n on the centre console.
ver be allowed to run for longer than 6
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 254 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
The instructions on the container give detailed information on
how to use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power socket.
Turn on compressor and
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
Remove the compresso
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor
Return all tools to their
Note If the vehicle is equipped
pressures using the SET butto
The compressor should ne
minutes.
If and when 255
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e steering wheel
and the component concerned.
ponding to the damaged electric
.
m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
e fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
partment
and its failed electrical component.
in the engine compartment by pressing
entre of the cover fig. 176.
e affected component page 257.
m inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
t onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
ver back on to ensure no water can enter
its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
d end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
ent.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 255 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath th
Switch off the ignition
Identify the fuse corres
consumer page 257
Take the plastic clip fro
blown fuse and pull th
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Fuse cover in engine com
Switch off the ignition
Remove the fuse cover
the tabs towards the c
Identify the fuse for th
Take the plastic clip fro
of the dash panel), fit i
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Carefully fit the fuse co
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circu
behind a cover at the left-han
side of the engine compartm
Fig. 175 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 176 Fuse box cover in engine compartment
If and when256
igher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
cal system.
uses in the vehicle. These are available from
ed in the following tables, there are other fuses
Technical Service Workshop.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 256 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Fuses colour code
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
If you replace a fuse with h
another location in the electri
Always keep some spare f
SEAT dealers.
In addition to the fuses list
which must be replaced by theColour Amps
light brown 5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
Natural (white) 25
Green 30
orange 40
Red 50
white 80
Blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
If and when 257
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ng aid) / Gear lever/ ESP switch- 10
sensor/ Alarm horn 5
sensor / Light switch 10
installation assistant 15
20
creen) 10
er motor 20
/ socket 20
40
it (coupling) 15
Consumer Amps
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 257 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag 5
10 RSE input (roof screen) 10
11 Vacant
12 Left xenon headlight 10
13
Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring
(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-
way/Flow meter
5
14 Gearbox/Power steering/Brake light sensor/
Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10
15
Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-
nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-
tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot
10
16 Right xenon headlight 10
17 Engine management 10
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Park Pilot (parki
board
21 Vacant
22 Volumetric alarm
23 Diagnosis / Rain
24 Trailer hook pre-
25 Vacant
26 Vacuum pump
27 RSE input (roof s
28 Rear window wip
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 Vacant
37 Vacant
38 Vacant
39 Trailer control un
Number
If and when258
, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
correct information for your model.
mpartment, left part
Consumer Amps
rs 20
30
it 5
20
15
l/Steering column 5
40
15
om Navigator 5
ent 5
ent 10
l unit 5
odule supply 15
odule supply 30
20
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 258 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list
to alterations. If discrepancies
inside of the fuse cover for the
Fuses layout, engine co
Fuses
40 Trailer control unit (turn signals, brakes and left
side) 20
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reverse light and
right side) 20
42 BCM wiring switchboard 20
43 Trailer pre-installation 40
44 Heated rear window 25
45 Electric windows (front) 30
46 Rear electric windows 30
47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15
48 Convenience controls 20
49 Heating controls 40
50 Heated seats 30
51 Sunroof 20
52 Headlight washer system 20
53 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20
54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5
55 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20
56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15
57
58 Central locking control unit 30
Number Consumer Amps
Number
1 Windscreen wipe
2 DQ200 gearbox
3 Cable control un
4 ABS
5 AQ gearbox
6 Instrument pane
7 Ignition key
8 Radio
9 Telephone/TomT
10 Engine managem
Engine managem
11 Vacant
12 Electronic contro
13 Petrol injection m
Diesel injection m
14 Coil
If and when 259
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
st turn off the failed component.
Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
condensation on the mirror surface, thus
d by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
ss part or on the base.
keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
e bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
.
ts 4)
bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
m incorporated.
5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
n bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
ange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 259 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, fir
Do not touch the bulb glass.
reduction in the bulb life and
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replace
on the bulb, either on the gla
It is highly recommended to
very least, the following spar
should be kept in the vehicle
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Turn signal - PY21W
Xenon23)/adaptive headligh
Dipped and full beam - D1S2
Daylight - P21W SLL
Position W5W
Turn signals PY21W
15 Engine management 5
Pump relay 10
16 Right lighting 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20 Water pump 10
Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20
21a) Lambda probe 15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
23a)
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25a) ABS pump 40
26 Left lighting 30
27a) Engine management 40
Engine management 50
28 Vacant
29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 50
a) Ampere rating according to motorisation
Number Consumer Amps
23) On this type of headlight, the
that complex elements must b
on the automatic control syste 24) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.
times more than that of haloge
stances, there is no need to ch
If and when260
Fig. 177 Main headlight bulbs
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 260 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Fixed tail light
Stop/Position - P21W25)
Turn signal - P21W
Mobile tailgate light
Fog light (driver side) - P21W
Reverse (passenger side) - P21W
Position - W5W
Side turn signal
Side turn signal - W5W
Number plate light
Number plate light - C5W
Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the
lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest
of your own safety, but also that of all other road users.
Due to the difficulty in accessing some of the bulbs, any replacement work
should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of
how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight bulbs
Turn signal
Dipped beam headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
25) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
AA
AB
AC
AD
If and when 261
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ts
Fig. 179 Dipped beam headlights
Fig. 180 Dipped beam headlights
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 261 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Turn signal bulbs
Raise the bonnet.
Rotate the bulb holder fig. 178 to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam headligh
Raise the bonnet.
Fig. 178 Turn signal
AA
If and when262
. 181 by pulling on this.
fig. 182 from the bulb.
182 inwards and to the right.
the replacement so that it sits correctly
reflector.
he reverse order.
Fig. 182 Main beam headlights
AC
A1
A2
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 262 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Remove the loops page 261, fig. 179 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
Remove the connector page 261, fig. 180 from the bulb.
Unclip the retainer spring page 261, fig. 180 pressing
inwards to the right.
Remove the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam headlights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig
Remove the connector
Press the spring fig.
Extract the bulb and fit
into the cut-out on the
Installation is done in t
A1
A2
A3
Fig. 181 Main beam headlights
If and when 263
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
r fig. 184 outwards.
lling it out and inserting the replacement.
the reverse order.
ke light
ghts.
rse.
A1
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 263 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 183 by pulling on this.
Extract the bulb holde
Replace the bulb by pu
Installation is done in
Tail lights
On the body
Turn signal, side and bra
On the tailgate
Left side: side and fog li
Right side: side and reveFig. 183 Side lights
Fig. 184 Side lights
AD
If and when264
the left fig. 186.
and change it for a new one.
in reverse order, taking special care when
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 264 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body
Open the cover of the luggage compartment side panel
fig. 185.
Turn the bulb holder to
Remove the blown bulb
To refit follow the steps
fitting the bulb holder.
Fig. 185 Lights on vehicle body
Fig. 186 Lights on vehicle body
If and when 265
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ut pressing on the securing tabs and
b and replace it with another.
in reverse order, taking special care when
t
the left.
b and replace it with another.
the reverse order.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 265 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Side light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
Side lights
Open the tailgate.
Pull the cover off.
Take the bulb holder o
extract it outwards.
Remove the blown bul
To refit follow the steps
fitting the bulb holder.
Fog light and reverse ligh
Open the tailgate.
Pull the cover off.
Turn the bulb holder to
Remove the blown bul
Installation is done in
Fig. 187 Lights on the tailgate
Fig. 188 Side lights
If and when266
lights
ssing on the inside edge of this -arrow-
screwdriver fig. 190.
Fig. 190 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 191 Luggage compartment light
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 266 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Side turn signals
Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the bulb.
Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.
Remove the faulty bulb and replace with a new one.
Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into
place.
First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs fig. 189, arrow .
Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 189.
Luggage compartment
Remove the bulb by pre
using the flat side of a
Fig. 189 Side turn signal
A1
A2
If and when 267
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ver, unscrew the bolts fig. 192.
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
the reverse order.
Fig. 193 Number plate light
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 267 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Press the bulb sideways and remove it from the housing
page 266, fig. 191.
Registration light
To remove the light co
Remove the bulb, mov
outwards fig. 193.
Installation is done in Fig. 192 Number plate light
If and when268
ng it in the direction of the arrow and
e a sufficient wire cross section.
use of a discharged battery, the battery can be
other vehicle to start the engine.
standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturers docu-
tion must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines
l engines.
h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
are connected.
st be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 268 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Sun visor light
Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure fig. 195.
Remove the bulb, movi
outwards fig. 195.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must hav
If the engine fails to start beca
connected to the battery of an
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
mentation). The wire cross sec
and at least 35 mm2 for diese
Note The vehicles must not touc
soon as the positive terminals
The discharged battery mu
trical system.
Fig. 194 Removing sun visor light
Fig. 195 Removing sun visor light
If and when 269
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
e red jump lead to the positive terminal
. 197 of the vehicle with the flat
of the red jump lead to the positive
icle providing assistance .
art-Stop system, connect one end of the
negative terminal in the vehicle
fig. 196.
tart-Stop system, connect one end of the
suitable ground terminal, to a solid metal
ne block or to the engine block itself
of the black jump lead to a solid metal
he engine block or to the engine block
h the flat battery. Do not connect it to a
.
uch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
vehicle with the flat battery and wait one
e engine is running.
e jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
A+
AB
A-
B
AX
AA
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 269 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
How to jump start: description
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .
2. Connect one end of th
fig. 196 or fig
battery .
3. Connect the other end
terminal in the veh
4. On vehicles with no St black jump lead to the
providing assistance
5. On vehicles with the S black jump lead to a
part bolted to the engi
fig. 197.
6. Connect the other end
component bolted to t
itself of the vehicle wit
point near the battery
7. Position the leads in s
contact with any movin
Starting
8. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
9. Start the engine of the
or two minutes until th
Removing the jump leads
10. Before you remove th
they are switched on).
Fig. 196 Diagram for connecting jump leads if the vehicle providing assistance the current is not fitted with the Start- Stop system: flat battery
and battery providing current . AA
AB
Fig. 197 Diagram for connecting jump leads if the vehicle providing assistance is fitted with the Start-Stop system: flat battery and battery providing current
.
AA
AB
A+
AA
A+
A
AX
If and when270
f the battery clamps must not be allowed to d to the positive battery terminal must not cle, this can cause a short circuit.
a way that they cannot come into contact engine compartment.
eries. This could result in chemical burns.
ach other, otherwise electricity could flow as
are connected.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 270 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
11. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle
with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are
generated when the leads are disconnected.
12. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse
order to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 219, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts o touch. The jump lead attache touch metal parts of the vehi
Position the leads in such with any moving parts in the
Do not bend over the batt
Note The vehicles must not touch e
soon as the positive terminals
WARNING (continued)
If and when 271
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
ing points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
te gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
you are towing. Brake sooner than normal
l gently.
towed vehicle
pe remains taut at all times when towing.
vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-bar.
elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
pe made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
w-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
ence, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
h the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
mpt to tow.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 271 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 268.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
General notes
Please observe the follow
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first un
gradually.
Begin and change gea
matic vehicle, accelera
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle
and pressing the peda
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-ro
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a
tow-rope if you do not have a
A tow-rope should be slightly
It is advisable to use a tow-ro
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the to
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experi
drivers should be familiar wit
enced drivers should not atte
If and when272
ed more than 50 km, the front wheels should
owing should be carried out by a qualified
d when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be
on.
ays be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
tarting.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 272 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.
The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be tow
be raised during towing, and t
person.
The steering wheel is locke
vehicle must then be towed w
carried out by a qualified pers
The towing eye should alw
notes on page 271, Tow-s
If and when 273
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
r by pressing down on its left-hand side.
by pressing down on the right hand side.
nti-clockwise, in the direction of the arrow,
the front fig. 198 or rear fig. 199
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 273 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Trailer eyes
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring from the on-board tool set.
Remove the front cove
Remove the rear cover
Screw the towing eye a
to the limit position in
threaded hole.
Fig. 198 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 199 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 274 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Description of specifications 275
Safety Fir l Tips Technical Specifications
viations used in the Technical Specifications section
revia- on
Meaning
W Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
S Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine
power.
m Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
m Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
0 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
O2 Carbon dioxide
N Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
N Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 275 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practica
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always has
precedence.
All technical specifications provided in this manual are valid for the standard
model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Inspection and Mainte-
nance Plan in the vehicle documents shows which engine is installed in the
vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbre
Abb ti
k
P
rp
N
l/10
g/
C
C
RO
Description of specifications276
he inside of the spare wheel recess in the
rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 200
in the Maintenance Programme.
r
ber (chassis number)
ne power output
letters
ior trim code
s
ided in the Maintenance Programme.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), urban.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), road.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km), combination.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 276 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identification
plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-
ment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on t
luggage compartment.
The following information is p
These data are also provided
Production control numbe
Vehicle identification num
Model code number
Model designation / engi
Engine and gearbox code
Paintwork number / inter
Optional equipment code
Consumption values
CO2 emission values.
Data from 2 to 9 are also prov
Consumption figures and CO2
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Fig. 200 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
Description of specifications 277
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicles handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions
xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
ar loads approved are selected in intensive
efined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
r maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
h). The figures may be different in other coun-
ehicle documents take precedence over these
bar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
we recommend that you always tow
rawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
ar load is too small.
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 277 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
tests indicated in regulations 715/2007/EC and 692/2008/EC.
Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .
WARNING
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.
Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawb
trials according to precisely d
valid for vehicles in the EU fo
circumstances up to 100 km/
tries. All data in the official v
data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted draw
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety,
approaching the maximum d
road will be poor if the drawb
Description of specifications278
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 278 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a
legal stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Technical Specifications 279
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
tions and restrictions on the technical data are
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 279 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Technical Specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 219.
Overview
Further explanations, instruc
contained as of page 275
Fig. 201 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Specifications280
5 RONa)
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 280 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 PS) without Start&Stop
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500 - 4000
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1390
Fuel Super 98 RON or Super 9
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 188
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7.2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2033
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1488
Gross front axle weight in kg 1010
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1035
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Technical Specifications 281
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
r 91 RONa)
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 281 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) Front-wheel drive
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211)/ 5300-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1984
Fuel Super 95 RON / Regula
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2150
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1606
Gross front axle weight in kg 1115
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1055
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Specifications282
91 RONa)
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 282 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS) All-wheel drive
Engine specifications
Performance
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211)/5300-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1700 - 5200
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1984
Fuel Super 95 RON / Regular
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 218
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7.6
Technical Specifications 283
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
top
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 283 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 77 kW (105 PS) DPF with/without Start&S
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2205
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1661
Gross front axle weight in kg 1140
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1085
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 77 (105)/ 4400
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500 - 2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1598
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Technical Specifications284
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 284 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 177
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8.3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12.6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2049
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1035
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Technical Specifications 285
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 285 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) DPF All-wheel drive
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Trailer weight
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 103 (140)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Maximum speed in km/h 193
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6.6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10.1
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2187
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1643
Gross front axle weight in kg 1115
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1086
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650
Technical Specifications286
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 286 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS) DPF All-wheel drive
Engine specifications
Performance
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/1750-2500
No. of cylinders/ capacity in cm3 4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CN
Maximum speed in km/h 204
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5.9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8.7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2159
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1615
Gross front axle weight in kg 1115
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1086
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Specifications 287
Safety Fir Technical Specifications
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 287 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
st Operating Instructions Practical Tips
Trailer weight
Engine oil capacity
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1650
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1650
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.5 litres
Technical Specifications288
Rear
1519 mm
1527 mm
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 288 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4493 mm/ 1778 mm
Height at kerb weight 1615 mm
Front and rear projection 940 mm/ 977 mm
Wheelbase 2578 mm
Turning circle 10.7
Track width
Front
1534 mm
1542 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 60 l. Reserve 8l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Index 289
tery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
re setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
iesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ke pedal
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 195
ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
changes
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 170
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 289 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AFS (cornering lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Air conditioner
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Air conditioner automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Anti-theft alarm
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 130
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 130
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Automatic gearbox
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 175
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Automatic windscreen wiper/washer . . . . . . . . 126
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 151
B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Bat
Befo
Biod
Biod
Bon
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bulb
Bulb
Buz
Index290
atic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
atronic
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
partment for on-board documentation . . 140
rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rols
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
xterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
enience closing
liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
enience opening
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 227
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ant loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
ant temperature
auge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ct adjustment of front seat head restraints . .
13
ct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 290 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Automatic locking system for involuntary
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Central locking button
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Changing gear in tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Changing the bulbs
Main headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the main headlight bulbs
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Turn signal bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing the tail light bulbs
Side light, fog light and tail light on the tailgate
265
Changing the tail lights
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Turn signal, side and brake lights on the body
264
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 229
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 234
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cleaning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Clim
Clim
G
Cloc
Cloth
Cloth
Cock
Com
Cont
Cont
Cont
E
E
S
Conv
S
W
Conv
W
Cool
W
Cool
W
Cool
Cool
G
S
Corre
Corre
In
Index 291
t filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
amic cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 119
nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
tric power steering
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 171
tronic Stability Programme . . . . . . . . . 86, 189
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
tronic Stability Programme (ESP)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
rgency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . 121, 187
rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
rgency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ssion control system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 219
ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 291 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Correct sitting position
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 186
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Differential lock fault (EDL)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Display (without warning or information texts) . 60
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 188
Driver
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Economically / Environmentally friendly . . 197
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Dus
Dyn
Dyn
E Eco
EDL
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Eme
Eme
Eme
Emi
Eng
Eng
Eng
Index292
t seat adjustment
umbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
etrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
level
dicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tank
pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
tank
ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ral overview of the engine compartment 279
e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 180
rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 292 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 85
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 189
See also Electronic Stability Programme . . 169
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 68
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFI lever
67
Open the Configuration menu with the steering
wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Flexible service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Folding tray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front drinks holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Front interior light type 1
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Front interior light type 2
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fron
L
Fuel
D
P
Fuel
In
Fuel
W
Fuel
O
Fuel
S
Fuel:
Fuse
G G 12
Gear
Gene
Glov
Glow
W
GRA
H Hand
W
Haza
Index 293
ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
gage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
See also Loading the luggage compartment 17
gage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
n beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122
n beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
n headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
ntenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ntenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IA-IN connector* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ors
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
tifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ti-purpose mobile storage compartment* . 147
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 293 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135
Adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 135
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Heated rear window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Information in the multifunction display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Information messages in the display . . . . . . . . . 65
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menus
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J Jack position points
Sill panel trim with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Load compartment in the luggage compartment
See Loading the luggage compartment . . . . 17
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17
Loc
Lug
Lug
M Mai
Mai
Mai
Mai
Mai
Man
Man
MED
MFI
Mirr
Mob
Mul
Mul
Index294
shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
window automatic wiper/washer . . . . . . 129
window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
mmended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
ote control key
uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
irs
irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
rse gear
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
back function
liding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ing in
ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 294 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 72
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Passenger
See Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 205
R Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Radio navigation steering wheel controls
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear drink holder*
Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rear fog light
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rear
Rear
Rear
Reco
Refu
Regi
Rem
B
S
Rem
Repa
A
Repl
Rev c
Reve
M
Roll-
S
W
Roof
Roof
Roof
Rubb
Run-
Runn
E
S Safe
Index 295
ring wheel audio controls
Audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 168
rage area
Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Other storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
rage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
rage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 143
blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
visor
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
tch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
tches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 295 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 136, 138
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt tensioner
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Starting petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 172
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Stee
Stee
Sto
Sto
Sto
Sun
Sun
Sun
Swi
Swi
Swi
T Tail
Tail
Index296
cle tools
torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
metric sensor*
ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ing messages in the display . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ing reports
ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 78
ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 78
ing symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ing triangle and first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . 152
her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 207
r
arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 228
r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ring suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 296 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Tank
Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Traction control system
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Trailer turn signals
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tyre Mobility System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . . 253
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 245
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tyre pressure warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 253
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 236
U Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Vehicle Maintenance
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 205
Vehi
S
Vehi
Vent
Volu
A
D
W Warn
Warn
Warn
Warn
R
Y
Warn
Warn
Was
Was
Was
Wate
W
Wate
Wea
Wea
Whe
T
Whe
Whe
Index 297
altea freetrack EN.book Seite 297 Donnerstag, 9. September 2010 12:40 12
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21, 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windscreen interval wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Changing the rear wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . 231
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 219
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omis- sion, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.10
Vehicle data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. Vehicle identification number
2. Identification numbers
Type/Model/Engine
Gearbox/Finishes
3. Identification letters
Engine/Gearbox/Paintwork
Equipment
4. Identification codes of variable equipment
5. Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) urban
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) motorway
Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed
Note
We recommend that you visit an Authorised SEAT Service Centre when- ever you require any work done on your vehicle.
SEAT regularly communicates to its Authorised Service Centres new product developments. They have tools and highly specialized person- nel who can guarantee the safety and performance of your vehicle.
Scrupulously following the General Programme for Inspection Services in Authorised SEAT Service Centres will ensure you maintain greater value for your vehicle.
Portada PM_interior.qxd:Interior Manual TOLEDO 26/7/10 15:57 Pgina 3
A LT
EA F
R EE
TR AC
K O <
Related manuals for Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Altea Freetrack Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea Freetrack as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea Freetrack. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea Freetrack 2010 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.